# MASTER CAM DESIGN

ENTERING DATA
When Mastercam prompts for data entry such as a value for height, width, radius, or angle, you can take one of the following actions. These actions apply to both the prompt area and dialog box fields. ¨ ¨ ¨ Notes: ¨ Mastercam remembers the previous XYZ coordinates that you entered. To use these values again, press [Enter] instead of entering a value for each of the coordinates. ¨ Mastercam accepts formulas as well as numbers. You can use addition [+], subtraction [-], multiplication [*], division [/], and parentheses [( )]. Use ordinary algebraic notation [i.e., x1+2/3y(16*.025)/8z-1/2]. ¨ Wherever Mastercam accepts real numbers and formulas, you can enter an angle value in degrees/minutes/seconds or gradians/radians formats. Use the following data entry tokens, always placing the token after the numeral: degrees=d minutes = ‘ seconds = " gradians = g radians = r ¨ When prompted for a real value (a length, a distance, or an angle) at the prompt line, you can use the up and down arrow keys to display previously entered values. Press either mouse button or press [Enter] to accept the displayed value. Type the data directly into the text box, then press [Enter]. Type the letter of a shortcut method, then press [Enter].

Data entry shortcuts
Data entry shortcuts let you enter data that you gather from the graphics area into the prompt area or any text box that asks for a real (or decimal) number. To use a data entry shortcut, enter the letter of the shortcut method, then click the point that you want in the graphics window. The shortcuts appear next to the prompt area as shown below. Clicking right in a text box displays a quick reference of the shortcuts and their meanings.

X X coordinate value for a selected point. Press [X] then choose the point whose X coordinate you want to use. 1

Y Y coordinate value for a selected point. Press [Y] then choose the point whose Y coordinate you want to use. Z Z coordinate value for a selected point. Press [Z] then choose the point whose Z coordinate you want to use. R Radius of a selected arc. Press [R] then select the arc whose radius you want to use, or select a radius dimension. D Diameter of a selected arc. Press [D] then select the arc whose diameter you want to use, or select a diameter dimension. L Length of a line, arc, or spline. Press [L] then select the entity whose length you want to use. Other methods for entering a length: select a linear format dimension, a witness line, or the distance between two witness lines; select text to enter text height as a length measurement. S Distance between two points. Press [S] then select the two points. A Angle. Displays the Angle menu which provides options for defining an angle value. ? Displays the quick reference to the data entry shortcuts. In a text box that accepts a real (decimal) number, right-click to display the quick reference. Defining angle values for data entry 1 Line Uses the angle of a single line that you select. Mastercam calculates the angle in a counterclockwise direction from the horizontal line of the current Cplane. 1 line also lets you select an angular dimension to obtain an angle value. 2 Lines Uses the angle formed by two lines that you select. Mastercam calculates the angle in a counterclockwise direction from the first selected line to the second selected line. P ts ( 2 or 3 ) Enter two or three points to determine an angle. Enter two points, then press [Esc] to calculate the angle of the line that runs between the two points in a counterclockwise direction from the horizontal axis of the current Cplane. When entering three points, the first point becomes the pivot point (equivalent to an arc center), and the next two points define an angular distance. Arc sweep An arc sweep is the distance in degrees from the start angle to its end angle. The system prompts you to select the arc whose sweep angle you want to use. Value Lets you type a value for an angle. Values are in decimal degrees by default, but can be entered in degree/minute/seconds format or gradians/radians format. Use the following data entry tokens, always placing the token after the numeral: degrees=d minutes = ‘ seconds = " gradians = g radians = r Examples: 25d11’5" 25g 200r

2

POINT ENTRY Entering Points
Throughout your work in Mastercam the system prompts you to enter points. By entering points you define positions in 3D space. You can enter points using one of two methods: Mastercam's AutoCursor™ feature or the Point Entry menu. When you enter a point, Mastercam projects the selected position onto the current construction plane. If the current Cplane is set to 3D, Mastercam uses the actual position of the selected point. About Auto Cursor The AutoCursor™ is a point entry feature that is available whenever Mastercam displays the Point Entry menu and prompts you to enter a point. AutoCursor eliminates menu steps by detecting and snapping to points as you move the cursor over geometry on the screen. Endpoints and midpoints of curves, lines, arc center points, and point entities are all detected and highlighted by AutoCursor. If AutoCursor doesn’t detect any points, the AutoCursor defaults to the Sketch Point Entry menu option, letting you enter a point at any position. At any time while AutoCursor is active, you can override the auto-selected point by using the mouse or keyboard shortcut keys to access Point Entry menu options. In complex geometry there may be more than one point that lies within the detection range of the cursor. In these cases, the AutoCursor uses the order shown below to detect and snap to points. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Point entities Endpoints of curves or lines Midpoints of curves or lines Quadrant points of arcs Centers of arcs Real curve or line intersections (not intersections projected by Mastercam) Points on the active selection grid

Note: AutoCursor does not recognize endpoints on surfaces. To enter a point at the endpoint of a surface, you must use the Endpoints option on the Point Entry menu. AutoCursor is active by default. To disable AutoCursor, choose Main Menu, Screen, Config, select the Screen tab, and clear the Use AutoCursor in Point Selection checkbox. Turning AutoCursor on or off 1. 2. 3. Right-click in the graphics window to display the menu. Choose AutoCursor. A check appears next to the AutoCursor menu selection when it is on. Right click and choose AutoCursor to turn it off. 3

Note: You can also choose Screen, Next menu, and toggle AutoCursor to Y. Entering a point using AutoCursor 1. Activate AutoCursor from the right-click menu.

2. Move the cursor over geometry on the screen. As Mastercam detects and snaps to points, it displays a temporary open-square over the point and highlights the corresponding Point Entry menu option. 3. When the cursor snaps to the point you want, left-click to enter the point.

Entering a point using XYZ coordinates You can enter a point using XYZ coordinates as an alternative to selecting a point with the cursor or using AutoCursor™. Mastercam accepts coordinates that use commas as separators (5,3,1) or that use the letter of the coordinate (x5y3z1). If you enter values for just one or two coordinates (x1 or x1y2), Mastercam uses the coordinate values of the last point you entered for any axes you omitted. If you are entering a point for the first time in the current Mastercam session, the system uses zero as the default value for any coordinates that you do not enter. 1. Once in the Point Entry menu, type the coordinate in either format described above. As soon as you begin typing, the prompt area opens a data entry field. 2. Press [Enter] to enter a point at the coordinate

Entering a point at the system origin Choosing Origin from the Point Entry menu places a point at the system origin. Mastercam places a point or sets a point position at the construction origin. System origin In the Cartesian coordinate system, the intersection of the X, Y, and Z axes (0,0,0) is known as the system origin. Often the system origin corresponds with the lower left corner of the part or the stock to be machined. The origin may also correspond with the 0,0,0 position on the milling machine, which is a known reference point for all machine moves. The system origin is fixed and cannot be changed. In Mastercam, the graphics view axes markers (also called the viewport axes markers) always refer to the system coordinates, which use 0,0,0 as the origin. The system coordinates are also referred to as world coordinates. You can view the system origin on screen by pressing [F9]. The system origin is shown in brown (default color). Construction origin The current Cplane has an origin, called the construction origin. In a new MC9 file, both the system and construction origins are set to 0,0,0. You set a new construction origin by pressing [Alt+ O] when in the Cplane menu and entering a coordinate or selecting a point in the graphics window. The construction origin remains set at the point that you choose until you change it, even when you change the Cplane (with one exception – when you retrieve a named view as described below). You can view the construction origin on screen by pressing [F9]. The construction origin is shown in green (default color).

4

An advantage of the construction origin is that it simplifies creating or translating geometry. Setting a construction origin relative to the current Cplane lets you think about XYZ coordinates with respect to the current Cplane only, not the system origin. This benefit becomes apparent when working on a large part where the system origin may not be visible in the graphics window. You can set the construction origin to be located near the area on the part where you are working and avoid the complication of calculating coordinates in reference to an origin that may not be on screen. You can save user-defined Cplanes as named views. An advantage of using named views is that you can associate an origin to a plane. When you change the Cplane to a named view, the construction origin changes to the origin linked to the view. For more information, see Creating a named view. Note: You can set the colors of the system and construction origins on the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen, Config, Screen tab, System colors). Entering a point at the center of an arc 1. 2. Choose Center from the Point Entry menu. Select an arc. Mastercam highlights the point at center of the arc.

Entering a point at the endpoint of an entity 1. 2. Notes: ¨ When selecting a surface entity, Mastercam enters a point at the closest corner. Choose Endpoint from the Point Entry menu. Select an entity. Mastercam highlights the entity’s endpoint.

¨ When selecting a trimmed surface, Mastercam calculates the surface edges of the base surface, not the trimmed surface. Therefore, the point may be created outside of the trimmed surface. Entering a point at the intersection of two curves The Intersec option lets you enter a point at the intersection of two curves (lines, arcs, or splines) in the current construction plane. Since two curves may intersect at multiple positions, be sure to select each curve near the intersection where you want to enter a point. When lines or arcs do not intersect, Mastercam calculates an extension to one or both entities and places a point where the entities could intersect. However, Mastercam cannot calculate a predictable extension to a spline. Intersec only works with a spline that could be intersected by a line or arc. 1. Choose Intersec from the Point Entry menu.

2. Choose the first curve, then choose a second curve that intersects the first. Mastercam highlights the intersection point. Entering a point at the midpoint of a curve This option lets you enter a point at the midpoint of a curve (line, arc, or spline). A midpoint is the point calculated halfway along the length of a curve.

5

Type the coordinate in the prompt area. 90. To enter a distance using XYZ coordinates. Setting up a grid for point entry The selection grid is a matrix of reference points that the cursor snaps to when you sketch a point. Move the cursor to a location on the screen where you want to enter a point. Choose Quadrant from the Point Entry menu. Mastercam highlights the point previously entered. or spline. 2. The point is entered at the location where the cursor projects onto the Cplane. 1. using the cursor to pick a position in the graphics window. 2. Type a value for distance (vector length) and press [Enter]. choose Polar. You can use the selection gridto enter points more precisely. then press [Enter] to define the point. 2. choose Last. Mastercam highlights the midpoint of the selected curve. Choose Relative from the Point Entry menu. Sketching a point at any position The Sketch option lets you enter a point freehand. Mastercam highlights the closest quadrant point. or 270 degree quadrant point of the arc. Entering a point at the position of an existing point 1. Snapping to the selection grid provides a finer level of precision than sketching points freehand. To enter a distance using polar coordinates. Choose Point from the Point Entry menu. choose Rectang from the menu. 2. 1. then left-click to highlight the point at that position. Entering a point at a quadrant position on an arc 1. Type a value for angle. Choose Midpoint from the Point Entry menu. 180. Choose Sketch from the Point Entry menu. Select a point. 3.1. arc. Select a line. Entering a point relative to the position of another point The Relative option lets you choose a point based on another point’s position. Entering a point at the last entered position From the Point Entry menu. 2. The Point Entry: Relative menu displays. then press the left mouse button. then press [Enter] to define the point. Mastercam highlights the selected point. Enter a point. 6 . Move the cursor close to the 0.

Enter a value (inches or millimetres) for Size to set the overall length and width of the grid (it can extend beyond the screen boundaries). 6. Enter values (inches or millimeters) in the Spacing X and Y fields for the distance between the grid points. Press [Esc] to return to the Selection Grid dialog box. 7 . The selection methods available vary according to the function that you are using. and choose the selection grid button from the Screen tab. 5. or customizing the appearance of the selection grid. Grid. The Selection Grid dialog box opens. Choose OK to save the settings. Enter a color number or choose the Color button to select the color for the grid points and origin marker. the Selection Grid Parameters dialog box opens to give you options for activating. When working with complex geometry. Sel. grid. 8. Enter an Origin XY coordinate for center of the grid or choose Select and choose a point from the graphics window. Screen. These values define the length and width of the grid cells. When you have the option to select more than one entity. Configure. Entity Selection Throughout your work in Mastercam the system prompts you to select entities. Mastercam displays the Entity Selection menu which provides several selection methods. Follow the procedure above to set up a default selection grid. Next menu. 1. Note: Be sure to check both Active grid and Visible grid to view the activated grid. The highlight color can be changed in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box. Sel. choose Screen. 9. Check Active grid to turn on the selection grid.When you press [Alt+G] or choose Screen. The simplest way to select entities is to click the mouse in the graphics window when the Entity Selection menu displays. 4. Check Visible grid to make the selection grid visible. 2. the entity highlights showing you what would be selected if you clicked at that position on the screen. deactivating. Choose Main Menu. To save the grid settings in the configuration file. the options in the Entity selection menu make selection easier and quicker than picking one entity at a time. Notes: ¨ The grid settings persist for the current MC9 file. The system highlights selected entities in white. 7. Next menu. When the cursor is very close to an entity. 3. The auto-highlight feature can be turned on and off in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog or in the right-click menu. Choose Test to view the grid settings before saving them.

such as a contour toolpath or pocket toolpath. 8 . when creating a contour toolpath. Many surface and solid creation methods require geometry to be chained. 3. choose All. Configure). Chaining is also used to define entities for several Analyze and Create functions and is an efficient method for entity selection even when a specific order is not required. you can also chain together separate sets of entities to be cut in a single operation. However. Click on highlighted entities to unselect them. Entities from the Entity Selection menu. Usually you chain the geometry that is used in a single operation. About chains Chaining activates entities in a specific order in preparation for a function such as toolpath or surface creation. surface. When you finish selecting entities. hold down both mouse buttons and move the cursor over geometry that you want to select. Unchained entities won’t be included in the toolpath. ¨ ¨ To quickly simplify a crowded screen and narrow your selection of entities.Selection Tips The following tips can aid your selection of entities as you work in Mastercam: ¨ Rapid-fire selection: To select single entities quickly. Unselecting entities 1. Chaining Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so that they form the foundation of a toolpath. Choose Unselect from the Entity Selection menu. When you chain geometry. and toolpaths. Mastercam highlights chains in the same color as selected entities. ¨ To narrow the selection of entities to only one level of geometry at a time. You can change the select color using the System Colors button in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. Chaining order and direction affect the way Mastercam generates surfaces. 2. press [Esc] to return to the Entity Selection menu. you select one or more sets of curves (lines. you chain the entities that form the shape that you want to be machined. Chaining identifies the geometry that makes up the surface sections or boundaries. arcs. release the mouse buttons. When finished. Chaining also determines the direction of tool travel during machining. For example. Most toolpaths require geometry to be chained. For example you can chain together the entities for separate parts to be cut from the same workpiece in the same operation. and splines) or points which have adjoining endpoints. To select all entities for a single operation. or solid. solids. use the Hide function. Chaining differs from other selection methods because it associates order and direction to the selected curves. use the Mask function and choose Attributes from the Selection Mask dialog box.

regular surface. Examples of closed chains are rectangles or circles. An open chain may consist of a single entity or several contiguous entities. The chaining direction determines the direction of tool movement in a toolpath. Chaining direction All chains have a direction. 9 . The chain starts at the base point of the arrow. Errors in establishing chaining direction often result in a twisted surface that can’t be machined. The arrow in the following graphic shows the counterclockwise chaining direction for a closed chain. In surface creation. Mastercam uses chaining direction to synchronize the chains to create a smooth. Examples of open chains are single lines or arcs. while the direction for open chains points toward one of the chain endpoints. In a closed chain the start and endpoints share the same coordinates. Direction for closed chains is either clockwise or counterclockwise.Chains also have these characteristics: Type (open or closed) Direction Order Branch points Chains are open or closed. Closed chains typically consist of several entities that have adjacent endpoints and that form a closed boundary. In an open chain the start and endpoints are different coordinates.

This chaining option is useful for geometry that consists of inside and outside shapes and provides an automated method of reversing the cutter offset from the inside shape to the outside shape. In a closed chain. For more control over the direction of closed chains. Reversing chaining direction for inner chains Use this chaining option to swap the chaining direction when chains are surrounded by an outer boundary. In the graphic below.Mastercam determines chaining direction differently for open chains than closed chains. the inside chains represent an opening which is cut out. check the box labeled Use cursor position for manual selection. Mastercam assigns chain direction based on the Direction for Closed Chains parameters in the Chaining Options dialog box. 10 . Closed chains are assigned either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction regardless of where you position the cursor when selecting the chain. Therefore. In an open chain. leaving the inside chain as scrap. When enabled. the cutter needs to be offset to the inside of the chain while the surrounding chain requires the cutter to be offset to the outside of the chain. the start point is placed at the end of the chain closest to the selection point and the chain direction points to the opposite end of the chain. this option sets chaining direction relative to the position of the cursor when you select an entity to be chained.

Chaining order Some Mastercam functions that require chaining produce unexpected results if the entities are chained in an order that prevents Mastercam from properly synchronizing the chains. requires separate curves to define along and across edges. Trim or Modify. Other functions that use chaining don’t require that the entities get chained in any particular order. When chaining for toolpaths. 11 . Entities can intersect without having their endpoints meet. You can see the current values in the prompt area whenever a chaining menu appears. The Chain Manager in the Operations Manager can then be used to re-order the chains. If you need to create a branch point at the intersection of two entities. You can check rapid moves with the Backplot function which represents rapid moves in yellow. Examples of these functions are loft. Mastercam only considers a position a branch point when multiple entity endpoints meet. Break command to divide the intersecting entities at a specific point. The values you select in the Chaining options dialog box will be in effect whenever you create a chain in the current file. ruled. A coons surface chaining. chaining is a selection method and order is irrelevant. order is important to ensure minimal rapid moves. and the Delete command. and swept surfaces. The topics below describe the individual options. you need to break both entities at their intersection point. To reach the Chaining options dialog box. for instance. In these cases. When Mastercam encounters a branch point during chaining. Mastercam also uses branch points as a method for synchronizing chains. Use either the Modify. Examples of these functions include the Xform commands Rotate and Mirror. Chaining options Use the Chaining options dialog box to set default values for a number of choices that affect how you work with chains. coons. select the Options command in several of the chaining menus. Branch points indicate where there are different paths that the chain can take. it prompts you to choose the path for the chain to follow. You can set the synchronization method in the Chaining Options dialog box. Branch points A branch point is the position where the endpoints of two or more entities meet.

Click on the topics below for more information. Configure function. Last prevents you from having to completely rechain the entities. for example when correcting a surface that didn’t generate properly. Point. arc. use Last from the Chaining Methods menu. Repeat step 2 to create additional points. Position. Point. 4.You can also set a number of system chaining defaults that will apply to all files. This eliminates the need to repeatedly choose Partial from the Chaining Methods menu when partial chaining. 3. Select a line. Create. Many of these values can be set during operation. The functions on the Create menu can be divided into three categories: Note: For information on setting default design and drafting values. Configure). These are set by way of the Chaining options button on the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. Creating points at fixed intervals along a curve 1. some are unique and can only be set prior to operation using the Screen. or spline. You can access the Point menu by choosing Main Menu. Creating entities The Create menu gives you options for creating geometric and drafting entities. Enter a point to create a point at that position. Create. Creating a point at any position in the graphics window 1. Create. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. see Setting default CAD values. enter the number of points to create along the entity. Choose Main Menu. however. You can access the Create menu by choosing Create from the Main Menu. Point. ¨ If the chain stops unexpectedly. Chaining tips ¨ Mastercam supports Auto-Partial chaining. ¨ To reselect the previous chained entities. 2. Mastercam rechains the entities so that you can edit the chains and correct chaining direction or order. Along ent. 12 . You can then use Modify functions to trim adjacent entities together in order to chain them. Choose Main Menu. Creating points The Point menu gives you options for creating point entities. use Analyze. Chain to check for overlapping entities. 2.

Creating a point at any position on a solid face 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected face. type [S] to activate snapping. Move the base of the arrow to a desired position. 3. Point. Create. Note: To create the point at the position of an existing point entity. Point. Choose Main Menu. or surface. Repeat step 2 to create points for additional NURBS splines. Repeat step 2 to create points for additional parametric splines. 2. Creating points at the control points of a NURBS spline 1. 5. 4. 2. Dynamic. arc. 4. then select a solid face. 3. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Dynamic. Node pts. Point. then left-click to create a point at that position. Creating a point at any position on a curve or surface 1. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. 4. spline.Note: The default value is an approximation based on the entity length divided by . Create. Select a line. Set Faces to Y. or press [Esc] twice to exit the function.1 inches for English units and 2. Cpts NURBS. Press [Esc] and repeat steps 2 and 3 to create points on a different entity. 13 . Creating points at the node points of a parametric spline 1. Choose Main Menu. Repeat step 3 to create additional points on the same entity. 3. Choose Main Menu. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create points along additional entities. Create. 3. Choose Solid face. Choose Main Menu. Point. 5. then left-click. 2. Select a NURBS spline.0 mm for metric units. Select a parametric spline. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

and/or splines. arcs. 6. 14 . Define the slice plane. Slice. or spline close to one endpoint. 5. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional points. type [S] to activate snapping. 4. Creating a point at a defined distance along a curve 1. Select a line. 5. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. 5. or press [Esc] twice to exit the function. Length. Press [Esc] and repeat steps 2 through 4 to create points on a different face. 4. to create points at a defined spacing interval from the intersections. Note: Entering the same value twice in a row exits you from the function. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. move the base of the display arrow to the side of the curves to keep after trimming. 1. 7. enter the distance to create the point from the selected endpoint. arc. In the prompt area. 2. then left-click. then choose Do it. Repeat step 4 to create additional points on the same face. Press [Esc] to exit the function. If prompted. Set parameters on the Slice menu. select one of the highlighted entities. Mastercam displays a temporary indicator of the plane in the graphics window. 3. Point. You also have options to create the points at offset positions. then left-click to create a point at that position. and to trim the curves to the resulting points. 6. Repeat step 3 to create additional points at different distances. 3. then left-click.4. Choose Main Menu. Point. Note: To create the point at the position of an existing point entity. then choose Done. 2. Create. Note: Mastercam will create the point at a defined distance from the endpoint closest to the cursor position when you select the entity. Move the base of the arrow to a desired position. Creating points at the intersections of a slice plane with curves This function slices selected curves with a plane and creates points at positions where the plane intersects the curves. Select one or more lines. Choose Main Menu.

1. Mastercam reports the number of points that were successfully projected. If Yes was selected in step 3. 15 . then press [Esc]. 7. choose Append to add the current data to the end of the existing file or Overwrite to replace the existing data with the current data. 9. 2. At the prompt. Point. Enter a point on or near the selected curve where you want the perpendicular distance to be calculated. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 10. Srf project. enter a value for the distance from the curve that you want the point to be created. Type a comment to display at the top of the file (optional). If you entered a value greater than zero in step 4. and/or solid faces. Point. 4. 3. If prompted. Note: Entering a zero value creates the point directly on the curve. 11. In the prompt area. 3. Creating a point at a perpendicular distance from a curve 1. and/or save the projection data to a file. Otherwise. Select one or more surfaces. If prompted that a file of the same name already exists. 5. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. Create. then choose Do it. Set parameters on the Projection menu. 8. If No was selected in step 3. arc. 6. 5. or spline in the graphics window. Press [Enter] to continue. select one or more points. then choose Save and continue with the remaining steps. Perp/dist. then press [Enter] to view the file. choose Yes to select existing point entities or No to enter points at any position in the graphics window. Close the file. enter one or more points. continue with step 10.Projecting points onto surfaces and solids You can use this function to create points at the projection positions. create lines along the projection paths. 4. enter a file name. 2. then press Done. Select the line on the side of the curve where you want to create the point. Choose Main Menu. solids. Create. 12. Select a line. Repeat steps 5 through 10 to project additional points. Mastercam displays a temporary line on both sides of the curve. In the prompt area.

or choose No to discard them. 5. ¨ Set to N to create a single point at each endpoint position and discard any duplicate points that occupy the same position in the graphics window. 4. Note: Save Dups has no effect if you discard the points (see step 3). arcs. Create. Select one or more arcs in the graphics window. Grid. 3. Creating points at the center of selected arcs 1. Point. Set parameters on the From Small Arcs/Circles menu. 5. Next menu. Next menu. 2. 3. Creating points in a bolt circle pattern 1. Point. 4. Choose Main Menu. Displaying and saving entity endpoints Choosing the Endpoints option on the Screen menu lets you view and create point entities at the endpoints of all visible lines. 2. then choose Do it. Create. Enter a point to position the lower left corner of the grid. then choose Do it. Point. and splines. Choose Yes to create and save the actual points. Repeat step 3 to create additional points. Choose Main Menu. Set parameters on the Bolt Circle menu. 3. then choose Do it. or press [Esc] to exit the function. ¨ Choose Save dups to change the setting as follows: Set to Y to create all displayed points. Create. 1. 2. Small arcs. 4. Set parameters on the Grid menu. even if duplicate points result. 3.Creating points in a grid pattern 1. 16 . Bolt circle. This is useful for determining the boundaries of an individual curve in a chain of curves. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional bolt circles. Endpoints. Choose Main Menu. Screen. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional grids. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. Next menu. Mastercam displays the points for you to view and prompts you to save them. Enter a point to position the center of the bolt circle. 2.

enter a value to position the line on the horizontal axis. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. 2. In the prompt area. Creating a line between any two points 1. 3.Creating lines The Line menu gives you options for creating line entities. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. enter a value to position the line on the vertical axis. Create. Create. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. Click on the topics below for more information. Choose Main Menu. Multi. Repeat step 3 to create additional lines. 3. Line. 4. 4. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Horizontal. 17 . 3. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the line. In the prompt area. Line. 2. Create. You can access the Line menu by choosing Main Menu. Create. Endpoints. Create. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal lines. Creating a horizontal line 1. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. Note: This point becomes the first endpoint of the next line that you create. Vertical. 2. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the first line. Line. Creating a vertical line 1. Repeat step 2 to create additional lines. 4. Line. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. Line. 2. Creating multiple lines connected at their endpoints 1.

Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. Choose Main Menu. Create. Line. 4. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional lines. Line. 5. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the line.5. Line. 18 . Polar. Creating polar lines 1. Tangent. In the prompt area. 2. Create. 6. Choose Main Menu. Creating tangent lines The Tangent Line menu gives you options for creating lines that are tangent to arcs and splines. Line. 2 arcs. Select an arc or spline. Click on the topics below for more information. You can access the Tangent Line menu by choosing Main Menu. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Creating a line tangent to an arc or spline at a defined angle 1. Choose Main Menu. Angle. Note: Select both entities close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. 7. Tangent. Note: Select the entity close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. enter the angle of the line. 4. 2. Create. In the prompt area. 6. Select the line to keep. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional tangent lines. Creating a line tangent to two arcs 1. 5. Tangent. enter the angle of the line. Enter the length of the line. 2. Select two arcs. Enter the length of the line. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

select the line to keep.3. 3. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional perpendicular lines. 4. Creating a line perpendicular to a curve through a point 1. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Create. Creating a line tangent to an arc or spline through a point 1. Tangent. In the prompt area. or spline. 4. Point. If prompted. Repeat step 2 to create additional tangent lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Perpendclr. Choose Main Menu. 4. 19 . Note: Enter the point close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. 3. 6. Point. Line. 7. Press [Esc] to exit the function. enter the length of the line. Create. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional tangent lines. Creating perpendicular lines The Perpendicular menu gives you options for creating lines that are perpendicular to curves. You can access the Perpendicular menu by choosing Main Menu. 2. Line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. Click on the topics below for more information. Select a line. 2. arc. 5. Enter a point for the perpendicular line to pass through. In the prompt area. 6. enter the length of the line. Enter a point for the tangent line to pass through. Select an arc or spline. 5. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Line. Choose Main Menu. Perpendclr.

4. Line. Line. Arc. Note: The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. Line. Create. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. 5. Creating a parallel line through a point 1. Click on the topics below for more information. Parallel. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional perpendicular lines.Creating a line perpendicular to a line and tangent to an arc 1. Creating parallel lines The Parallel menu gives you options for creating parallel lines. Create. Note: The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. Creating a parallel line using an offset distance and direction 1. 3. 6. Select an arc for the perpendicular line to be tangent to. Create. Repeat step 3 to create additional parallel lines. 2. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam creates each parallel line by offsetting an existing line by a defined distance or through a point. 7. Parallel. 4. 5. enter the offset distance. 4. Indicate the offset direction by left-clicking on one side or the other of the selected line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional parallel lines. 3. 3. Side/dist. Enter a point for the parallel line to pass through. In the prompt area. Select a line. Point. You can access the Parallel menu by choosing Main Menu. 5. Create. Select the line to keep. Choose Main Menu. Line. Select a line. 20 . enter the length of the line. Choose Main Menu. Select a line for the new line to be perpendicular to. Perpendclr. 2. Parallel. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

arc. Enter a value for Offset distance and Number of steps. Notes: ¨ ¨ The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Notes: ¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. then choose OK to close the dialog box. Select a line. 21 . Select the line to keep. 4. Offset. Note: If you entered a negative offset distance on the Offset dialog box. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. Select a line. Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. Line. Mastercam moves the entity in the opposite direction from the one you indicate.Creating a parallel line tangent to an arc 1. 6. Choose Main Menu. 4. depending on the offset direction. Click on one side or the other of the selected entity to indicate the offset direction. 5. Parallel. Xform. The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. On the Offset dialog box. Select an arc for the parallel line to be tangent to. 2. Arc. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to offset additional curves or press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional parallel lines. Mastercam offsets the curve. 1. or spline in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. The direction is perpendicular to the curve at every point along the curve relative to the current construction plane. it displaces it by a defined distance and direction. 6. Create. ¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle. Offsetting a single curve When Mastercam offsets a single curve. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy. 3.

arc. or spline. Line. 4. Arc. Create. 2.¨ The Create. Click on the topics below for more information. line. 2. If prompted. You can access the Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional bisecting lines or midlines. Mastercam calculates arcs in a counterclockwise direction. 1. Line. 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. For more information. 5. Polar. Select a point. select the bisecting line to keep. which begins midway between the start of the first selected line and the closest endpoint of the second selected line. 22 . Create. 4. press [Alt+F1] to fit the geometry to the screen. Create. For parallel lines. 5. Creating a line at the closest position between two curves or a curve and a point Note: For intersecting lines. You can access the Polar Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. 3. Closest. 6. Parallel function gives you several options for offsetting single lines. Select a line. Creating polar arcs The Polar Arc menu gives you options for creating arcs using polar coordinates. Note: If the intersection point is out of view. Create. In the prompt area. CREATING ARCS The Arc menu gives you options for creating arc entities (including circles). Click on the topics below for more information. or spline. Choose Main Menu. 3. Mastercam creates a point. Select two lines. Mastercam creates a midline. Arc. Creating a bisecting line or a midline Note: For intersecting lines. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional lines. Mastercam creates a bisecting line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. enter the length of the line. Choose Main Menu. Line. Bisect. arc. see Creating parallel lines. Mastercam displays the length of the resulting entity in the prompt area.

4. 5. Enter the end angle of the arc in degrees. Polar. Creating a polar arc with a defined starting point 1. Creating a polar arc with a defined center point and by sketching the start/end angles 1. Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. Center pt. 3. 5. 7. In the prompt area. Arc. 7. 5. Create. Sketch. 2. In the prompt area. Note: You can create a full circle by entering the same point for the initial and final angles. 3. 3. enter the radius of the arc. 4. Enter a point for the end angle of the arc. Create. Enter a point for the center of the arc. Choose Main Menu. Arc. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Polar. Enter the final angle of the arc in degrees. Enter a point for the starting point of the arc. Arc. Choose Main Menu. 1. Enter a point for the start angle of the arc. 4. Choose Main Menu. Enter the initial angle of the arc in degrees. 6. Create. Enter the start angle of the arc in degrees. Enter a point for the center of the arc. 7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.Creating a polar arc with a defined center point and start/end angles Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. 2. 23 . enter the radius of the arc. 2. enter the radius of the arc. 6. Start pt. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. In the prompt area. Polar. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs.

enter the radius of the arc. 24 . 3 points. Choose Main Menu. enter the radius of the arc. 7. Arc. 3. Create. Arc. Enter two points for the endpoints of the arc. 5. Creating an arc with a defined radius and endpoints 1. 4. Enter three unique points. Note: No more than two of the points that you enter in step 2 can be collinear. Arc. 5. 3. 6. Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. Choose Main Menu. Enter the end angle of the arc in degrees. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional arcs. Endpoints. Repeat step 2 to create additional arcs. 6. Select the arc to keep. Note: The radius that you enter in step 3 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the two points that you enter. 4.Creating a polar arc with a defined ending point 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. End pt. Enter the start angle of the arc in degrees. Enter a point for the ending point of the arc. In the prompt area. 4. In the prompt area. Creating an arc with three defined edge points 1. 2. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. 2. 3. Create. Create. Polar.

2. 5. Notes: ¨ The radius that you enter in step 2 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the closest points on the two curves that you select in step 3. enter the radius of the arc.Creating tangent arcs The Tangent Arc menu gives you options for creating arcs that are tangent to curves and points. 4. . Click on the topics below for more information. 3. or splines. Create. Select two lines. 6. Arc. 3. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional circles. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 1 entity. Creating an arc tangent to one arc or line 1. Tangent. Select a line or arc. Enter a point for the arc to be tangent with the selected entity. ¨ ¨ You cannot create the arc between two parallel lines. 5. Creating a circle tangent to two curves 1. 7. Create. Tangent. If prompted. Create. enter the radius of the circle. In the prompt area. In the prompt area. 6. Press [Esc] to exit the function. the system projects the point along the normal vector of the selected entity. Select the arc to keep. Arc. The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entities. 2 entities. You can access the Tangent Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. 25 Choose Main Menu. Notes: ¨ If the point that you enter in step 3 does not lie on the selected line or arc. select the circle to keep. Arc. Tangent. Choose Main Menu. 2. ¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. arcs. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs.

Choose Main Menu. Tangent. In the prompt area. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional circles. Create. enter the radius of the circle. 3 ents/pts. Create. Create. 6. Tangent. 2. lines. 3. Select a line for the circle to be tangent to. 3. Notes: ¨ ¨ The lines you select in steps 2 and 3 cannot be parallel to one another. and arcs 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Arc. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: If the circles are out of view. 26 . Choose Main Menu. The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entities. Repeat step 2 to create additional arcs. Choose Main Menu. press [Alt+F1] to fit the geometry to the screen. Arc. Center line. Tangent.¨ While similar to filleting two curves. 7. Creating an arc tangent to a line or arc with a defined edge point 1. this function always creates a full circle and does not give you the option to trim the selected entities Creating an arc tangent to three points. The circle may be created on an extended portion of the selected line. Select three points. Select the circle to keep. and/or arcs. Note: Choose Point entry to enter tangent points in the graphics window. 4. lines. Arc. Select a line to pass through the center of the circle. 2. 4. 5. Creating a circle tangent to a line using a defined center line 1. Notes: ¨ ¨ You cannot create a tangent arc between three parallel lines. Point.

Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. ¨ The radius that you enter in step 4 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the entity selected in step 2 and the point entered in step 3 at the closest pass between them. then left-click. or spline. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. to maintain 180 degrees or less. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. Creating a circle using two defined edge points 1. 3.2. Enter two points to lie on the edge of the circle. type [S] to activate snapping. 3. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. 1. if necessary. Creating an arc tangent to a curve at any position This function creates an arc that is less than or equal to 180 degrees. Create. Select a line. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the arc. 2. Enter a point for the arc to pass through. 5. In the prompt area. 5. ¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected line. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional arcs. Note: To set the tangent point to the position of an existing point. 27 . 6. Circ 2 pts. 4. enter the radius of the arc. Arc. 6. Choose Main Menu. Select the arc to keep. Repeat step 2 to create additional circles. Tangent. Notes: Select a line or arc for the arc to be tangent to. Mastercam calculates 180 degrees between the points and fits a circle to them. Mastercam adjusts the direction of the arc. 4. Move the base of the arrow to a desired point. move the cursor crosshairs overt the point. Dynamic. 3. Choose Main Menu. Arc. then left-click. 7. arc.

Creating a circle with a defined center point and radius 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu. Repeat step 2 to create additional circles. 3. Creating a circle with a defined center point and diameter 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. 4. Choose Main Menu. Create. In the prompt area. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Arc. You can control 28 . Choose Main Menu. which can be either a point or crosshair. Arc. Enter a point for the center of the circle. Choose Main Menu. enter the radius of the circle. 2. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. Enter a point for the center of the circle. Creating a circle with defined center and edge points 1. 5. Arc. 3. In the prompt area. 4. Circ pt+rad. Enter a point to lie on the edge of the circle. Enter a point for the center of the circle. Create. 2. The mark. 4. Automating and formatting arc center lines You can automatically mark the center of arcs as you create them. is real geometry that can be selected and manipulated like any other geometry. 5. Circ 3 pts. Arc. Circ pt+edg.Creating a circle using three defined edge points 1. Create. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter three points to lie on the edge of the circle. 5. Circ pt+dia. 3. enter the diameter of the circle.

To control crosshair line length. fillets at sharp corners on the rectangular shape. ¨ 9. check Define in the Level group and either enter a level number or choose Select and select a level from the Levels dialog box. To place the mark on a different level. check Define in the Color group and either enter a color number or choose the color button to select a color from the palette. Configure. 1. or Lines to mark the center with a crosshair. Choose the CAD Settings tab. Select Point to mark the arc center with a point. 3. ¨ box. The System Configuration dialog box opens. and style and crosshair size. Screen. and/or a surface within the boundary of the rectangular shape. and line style. Choose Center Lines (arcs) The Automatic Center Lines dialog box opens. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. 4. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Unless you change the settings. and Ellipse) that are composed of lines and/or arcs and are defined within a rectangular boundary. 7. level. you have the option to create a point at the center of the rectangular shape. Single D. The crosshair line length will be the percentage of the arc diameter you entered. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. do one of the following: Check Current to use the current system line style. ¨ ¨ 8. 5. Choose Main Menu. 29 . To use a color different from the current system color. level. To control crosshair line style. then either enter a line style number or choose Select and select a style. 6. do one of the following: ¨ Choose Percentage of diameter and enter a percent value. ¨ ¨ Choose Fixed length and enter a line length in current units.color. Check Define. the mark uses the current system color. 2. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Creating rectangular-shaped geometry The Rectangular Shape menu gives you options for creating rectangles and other geometric shapes (Obround. Double D. In addition.

Choose 1 point. Note: Be sure to select the square that represents the placement point to use on the rectangular shape. 2. 2. 7. Select a rectangular shape from the list. 9. Choose Options. Create. Create. 30 . Note: The angle increment is used to calculate the number of lines contained in the ellipse shape. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose OK. 3. Note: The angle increment is used to calculate the number of lines contained in the ellipse shape. 8. then choose OK. 3. 7. Enter a point to position the rectangular shape in the graphics window. If prompted. choose Main Menu. 5. 4. 10. Enter two points for opposing corners of the rectangular shape. Set the remaining parameters. 6. Choose Options. 6. Set the remaining parameters. Rectangle. Creating rectangular-shaped geometry with one defined placement point 1. Select a rectangular shape from the list. Choose Main Menu. Creating rectangular-shaped geometry with two defined placement points 1. 4. 8. enter the angle increment. A smaller value results in a smoother shape. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to create the shape in additional positions in the graphics window. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to create the shape in additional positions in the graphics window. 5. Rectangle. then choose OK. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. Choose Main Menu. If prompted. Set parameters on the Rectangle One Point dialog box. A smaller value results in a smoother shape. enter the angle increment. Choose 2 points. Rectangle. Create.To access the Rectangular Shape menu.

see Rectangle Options dialog box. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Creating a polygon You can create a polygon as a NURBS spline or as a collection of individual linked lines. Create. 12. You must have a minimum of three. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. The System Configuration dialog box opens. Create. ¨ box. 10. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. 8. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose OK to register your choices. The Rectangle Options dialog box opens. Screen. ¨ You can also access the System Configuration dialog box by pressing [Alt+F8]. Choose Rectangular Shapes. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Notes: ¨ You can change rectangular shape options by choosing Main Menu. The Create Polygon dialog box displays. Configure. Setting default rectangular shape options The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you set defaults for rectangle creation options. 2. ¨ Choose Main Menu. Polygon. Choose the CAD Settings tab. 9. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. 13. The System Configuration dialog box reopens. 31 . Options from the Main Menu. 1. Set parameters as follows: Number of sides – Sets the number of sides for the polygon. see Creating an ellipse. Check the options you want Mastercam to use by default. Rectangle. For more information. 11. Note: For information on creating an ellipse that is composed of a single NURBS spline.9. Next menu.

¨ Radius – Sets the polygon’s radius. Ellipse. 2. 5. Enter a point for the center of the polygon. The Create Ellipse dialog box displays. this measures the radius from the center of the polygon to the corners. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Multi. When left blank. Create. 4. each representing a side of the polygon. When checked. 3. Choose OK. Creating an ellipse 1. When checked. Creating multiple lines connected at their endpoints 1. Repeat step 3 to create additional lines. 2. Set parameters as follows: X Axis Radius – Sets the radius of the ellipse’s horizontal axis Y Axis Radius – Sets the radius of the ellipse’s vertical axis Start Angle – Sets the angle that Mastercam begins creating the ellipse End Angle – Sets the angle that Mastercam finishes creating the ellipse 32 . this creates the polygon as multiple lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat step 4 to create additional polygons using the current values. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the line. 5. 4.Sets the type of entity to create for the polygon. Next menu. ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. ¨ Create NURBS . 6. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the first line. which is the distance from the center of the polygon to the edge of the polygon. ¨ Rotation – Sets the angle that Mastercam uses to position one of the sides of the polygon relative to the current construction plane. this measures the polygon from the center to the midpoint of the sides. ¨ Measure radius to corner – Determines how Mastercam measures the radius of the polygon. Note: This point becomes the first endpoint of the next line that you create. The Measure Corner option determines how Mastercam measures the radius. When left blank. Create. Choose Main Menu. Line. this creates the polygon as a single NURBS spline broken at the starting point. 3.

Choose OK. Enter the necessary distances and angle values and choose OK. 5. Distance 2 sets the distance from the endpoint of the second line you select to be chamfered (step 4). Repeat step 4 to create additional chamfers. ¨ Dist/Angle – Allows you to set one distance and an angle. which allows you to set an angle that determines the chamfer of the second line you select in step 4.¨ Rotation . When selected. 3. When selected. 2. Notes: ¨ Mastercam creates each ellipse as a NURBS spline. The Chamfer dialog box displays. 6. 4. the Parameters area displays only one Distance field. When selected. You can press [Enter] after changing any of the parameters to see how the changes effect the ellipse. Chamfering lines 1. see Creating rectangular-shaped geometry. the Parameters area displays two distances: Distance 1 sets the distance from the endpoint of the first line you select to be chamfered (step 4). Next menu. ¨ For information on creating an ellipse shape using line segments. Chamfer. the Parameters area displays two fields: Distance. and Angle. Choose Main Menu. Create. ¨ 2 Distances – Allows you to set two separate distances. Select one of the following chamfer Methods: ¨ 1 Distance – Allows you to set the chamfer to equal distances from the endpoints of the two lines selected in step 4. 3. 5.Sets the angle used to rotate the long axis of the ellipse about its center point Note: The Create Ellipse dialog box includes a preview window that shows how the ellipse will look. Enter a point for the center of the ellipse. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which allows you to set the distance from the endpoint of the first line you select in step 4. Select two non-parallel lines. ¨ You can create a partial ellipse by entering a start angle greater than 0 degrees and/or an end angle less than 360 degrees. 33 . 4. Repeat step 4 to create additional ellipses using the current values.

which causes Mastercam to trim the selected lines to the chamfer. You can chamfer arcs using the 1 Distance and 2 Distances methods. Fillet.6. Mastercam prompts you to chain entities when you return to the graphics window. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. ¨ The Trim option is selected by default. Notes: ¨ Press [Esc] to exit the function. you create an arc of a defined radius tangent to the curves. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. When you fillet curves. By default. Create. Filleting curves he Fillet menu gives you options for filleting curves. 34 . Deselect this option if you do not want Mastercam to trim the selected lines. Mastercam trims the curves to the fillet. ¨ If you select the Chain selection option. Modify. although you have the option to turn off trimming. Fillet or by choosing Main Menu.

P to create fillets at positive. Chain . See Filleting corners along chains of curves for more information. P. This option is a Yes/No toggle. or N to create fillets at negative. Trim .Determines whether Mastercam trims the selected curves to the fillet. Choose A to create fillets along all corners. and N. or clockwise (CW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). or counterclockwise (CCW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). CW /CWW – Determines which corners are used to create fillets along the chains of curves. Notes: ¨ This option applies only when Filleting corners along chains of curves. L.Displays the Chaining Methods menu where you can select chains of curves to create fillets at sharp corners along the chains. 35 . This option toggles between A. These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance.Radius – Determines the size of the resulting fillets. or F (Full) to create fillets that are full circles (360 degrees). Choose Y to activate trimming or N to deactivate trimming. Choose S (Smaller) to create fillets that are smaller than 180 degrees. L (Larger) to create fillets that are larger than 180 degrees. This option toggles between S. and F. Angle Determines the sweep of the fillet arc. ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies).

Note: Choosing ‘S’ creates fillets smaller than 180 degrees. To change the size of the fillets (optional). and ‘F’ creates fillets that are full circles. 4. and ‘F’ creates fillets that are full circles. 7. Fillet. L. 3. Mastercam displays the Fillet menu and shows the default menu values in the prompt area. Modify. choose Radius.Filleting two curves 1. or splines. To change the sweep of the fillets (optional). toggle Angle<180 to S. 2. choose Radius. Note: Choosing ‘S’ creates fillets smaller than 180 degrees. ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Note: When the Trim option is set to ‘Y’. 6. toggle Trim to Y or N. Mastercam trims the tangent curves to the resulting fillets. Fillet. 1. ‘L’ creates fillets larger than 180 degrees. relative to the chaining direction. Fillet. Filleting corners along chains of curves The Fillet. Modify. L. then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. 5. You have the option to create fillets at all corners or at clockwise or counterclockwise corners. or press [Esc] to exit the function. To change the trimming mode (optional). 36 . When Trim is set to ‘N’. ‘L’ creates fillets larger than 180 degrees. toggle Angle<180 to S. select the fillet to keep. 3. Choose Main Menu. If prompted. To change the size of the fillets (optional). Mastercam creates the fillets but does not trim the tangent curves. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional fillets. then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. Select two lines. arcs. toggle Trim to Y or N. Chain function lets you create fillets at sharp corners along selected chains of curves. 4. Notes: ¨ The radius you enter in step 2 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the entities you select in step 5. To change the trimming mode (optional). 2. Create. or F. Mastercam displays the Fillet menu and shows the default menu values in the prompt area. or F. To change the sweep of the fillets (optional).

To change which corners result in fillets (optional).Note: When the Trim option is set to ‘Y’. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance. Mastercam trims the tangent curves to the resulting fillets. Select one or more chains of curves. ‘N’ results in clockwise corners (relative to the chaining direction) being filleted. P. Notes: ¨ Repeat steps 2 through 8 to create additional fillets. Fillet. or N. these two functions were separate C-Hooks. Choose Chain. 7. 8. 6. Choose Yes to change existing fillets to the current radius or No to maintain the original radii of existing fillets. toggle CW/CCW to A. 9. then choose Done. Mastercam displays the prompt (in the menu area) shown below. ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary (step 5) is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). Y0. the Helix function lets you create a tapered helix as a parametric spline with the center at X0. Prior to version 9 of Mastercam. 37 . 5. Note: Choosing ‘A’ results in all corners being filleted (regardless of the chaining direction). The Spiral function creates spiral geometry as a series of parametric splines. Spiral/Helix dialog box The Spiral/Helix dialog box allows you to select between the Spiral function and the Helix function. ‘P’ results in counterclockwise corners (relative to the chaining direction) being filleted. If the selected chains contain existing fillets. When Trim is set to ‘N’. Create. or press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam creates the fillets but does not trim the tangent curves.

¨ Choose Main Menu. 5. 5-degree angle. Next menu. which is the incremental distance (step down) in the Z where the spiral will begin. and final pitch values of zero. 3. Place the spiral using the Point Entry menu selections or by clicking the mouse button at the desired location. Choose OK. The Spiral/Helix dialog box displays. ¨ Incremental Angle – Controls the number of points on each spline by specifying the angle at which Mastercam will recalculate the spiral. 38 . ¨ ¨ ¨ # of revolutions – Sets the number of times the spiral will complete a 360-degree revolution XY Initial Pitch – Determines the amount that the radius increases in a single revolution. The Point Entry menu displays.2. initial Z pitch of . The system calculates and displays the spiral in the graphics window. 4.Creating a spiral 1. 7 revolutions. ¨ Z Final Pitch – Sets the Z depth for the final revolution of the spiral. Spiral/Helix. Select the Spiral radio button. initial XY pitch of .8. ¨ Z Initial Pitch – Determines the distance in the Z axis between each revolution. Create. The following illustration shows a spiral created with a 1-inch radius. XY Final Pitch – Sets the pitch value for the final revolution of the spiral. Enter the parameters as follows: Radius – Sets the radius for the first spline in the spiral. 2.

Select the Helix operation radio button. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. ¨ ¨ Taper Angle – Specifies the thread taper angle. Place the helix using the Point Entry menu selections or by clicking the mouse button at the desired location. Choose OK. Creating splines The Spline menu gives you options for defining the method used to create the spline as well as parameters that further define the resulting geometry. Spiral/Helix. centered on X0. The system calculates and displays the tapered helix in the graphics window.Creating a helix 1. 39 . 3. ¨ Pitch – Sets the distance from a point on one thread to the corresponding point on the next thread measured parallel to the axis. 5. ¨ Incremental Angle – Controls the number of points on each spline by specifying the angle at which Mastercam will recalculate the spiral. Create. ¨ # of revolutions – Sets the number of times the spiral will complete a 360-degree revolution 4. Radius – Sets the radius for the first spline in the spiral. Y0. ¨ Choose Main Menu. Enter the parameters as follows: Starting Angle – Sets the angle at which the helix will begin. 2. Next menu. The Spiral/Helix dialog box displays. Create. The Point Entry menu displays. You can access the Spline menu by choosing Main Menu. Spline.

Notes: ¨ You can create a closed spline by selecting the same point for the first and last points in step 4. 40 . Set the Type and Ends parameters on the Spline menu. 6. 3. Note: The spline passes through the first two points that you select then through all other points that lie within the pattern until it reaches the third selected point. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional splines. define the end condition of the spline’s endpoints. Select three points. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. then press [Esc]. 1. Spline.Creating a spline using manual point entry 1. If prompted. 7. 5. Choose Main Menu. 2. 4. Create. Note: The resulting spline passes through the points you enter in step 3 in the order in which you enter them. define the end condition of the spline’s endpoints. Creating a spline using automatic point entry This function creates a spline from a string of points that lie in a defined pattern. 1. 2. Create. Choose Main Menu. Set the Type and Ends parameters on the Spline menu. Choose Manual from the Spline menu. Choose Automatic from the Spline menu. If prompted. You can create a closed spline by entering the same point for the first and last points in step 4. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional splines. Enter points for the spline to pass through. 3. Spline. 4.

Choose Blend from the Spline menu.¨ Mastercam uses a combination of distance and direction from point to point to place the points in a sensible order. 3. Set the Type parameter on the Spline menu. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. then choose Do it. 2. Create. 2. 3. To avoid distorting the intended shape of the spline. then choose Do it. Creating a spline tangent to two curves 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 9. 5. 1. then left-click. Choose Curves from the Spline menu. arc. Create. Set parameters on the Spline Blending Between 2 Curves menu. type [S] to activate snapping. and you can choose to keep. blank. then choose Done. delete or blank extraneous points. 8. Choose Main Menu. 4. Set parameters on the From Curve(s) menu. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. Select a line. Creating splines from existing curves This function creates splines based on the geometry of existing curves. 41 . Spline. 7. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for a second blending curve. 6. Spline. or spline for the first blending curve. 5. You can set a tolerance that determines how closely each resulting spline matches the selected curves. Note: Mastercam creates a separate spline for each chain of curves that you select in step 4. then left-click. or delete the original curves once the splines have been created. Mastercam displays a temporary spline between the tangent points. Choose Main Menu. Set the Type parameter on the Spline menu. 4. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to create additional splines. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional splines. Note: To set the point of tangency to an existing point. Select one or more chains of curves. Move the base of the arrow to the desired tangent position.

On the Spline End Conditions menu. ¨ ¨ ¨ Set the end condition of the selected endpoint by taking one of the following actions: Choose 3 pt arc. The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. Screen. Choose the CAD Settings tab.Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. enter the XYZ coordinates for the tangent vector. you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. For more information. see Creating a spline using manual point entry and Creating a spline using automatic point entry. 1. Choose Natural. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. also the surfaces defined from them. The System Configuration dialog box opens. 3. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. toggle Endpoint to F to set the end condition for the first endpoint or L to set the end condition of the last endpoint. In the prompt area. See Surface types for more information on surface types. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. 2. Configure. Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Defining the tangency of a spline at its endpoints To define a spline’s end conditions. you must first create a spline using manual or automatic point entry with the Ends parameter set to Y. 2. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. 42 . 1. also the surfaces defined from them. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. 4. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. While these types will be generated by default. ¨ box. Choose Values. ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points.

Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a counterclockwise direction. or spline. Note: You cannot reverse the vector direction if you set the end condition using 3 pt arc or Natural. 6. 4. Choose To entity. Note: We recommend that you accept the default spacing. or spline. 5. arc. 7. You can access the Create Letters dialog box by choosing Main Menu. Note: It is not necessary to select a font size. Create. Vertical – Places the text top-to-bottom starting at the insertion point you select. Click on the topics below for more information. and NURBS splines. Choose To end. Choose Angle. Creating geometric text using TrueTypeÒ fonts 1. Select an alignment for the text: Horizontal – Places the text left-to-right starting at the insertion point you select. ¨ Top of Arc – Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a clockwise direction. enter the radius of the arc to write the letters along. 2. The Font dialog displays. Choose Do it to set the spline. Choose the TrueType® button. Next menu. Select a line. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other endpoint. Select a font and font style. then choose OK. If you selected Top of Arc or Bottom of Arc for the alignment. arc. if necessary. arcs. Select a line. Creating geometric text The Create Letters dialog box gives you options for creating alphanumeric characters comprised of lines. if necessary. Create. ¨ ¨ In the Letters area. enter the text to create as geometry.¨ ¨ ¨ 3. which is calculated based on letter height. The Create Letters dialog box displays. enter the angle of the tangent vector. Next menu. Choose Main Menu. 43 . Letters. 3. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the vector. In the prompt area. Letters. ¨ Bottom of Arc . Enter the height of the letters and the spacing between each letter.

3. respectively. 2. Choose Main Menu. enter the text to create as geometry.8. 8. 6. The Create Letters dialog box displays. and splines. The Create Letters dialog box displays. text. arcs. Configure the parameters on the Note Text tab to obtain the desired appearance for the selected Note: The Drafting Globals parameters overwrite the Font and Height settings made in steps 2 and 4. 7. 1. Enter the start point for the letters. Select a Drafting font from the Font pull-down menu. If the letters that you create are not the size that you want. Create. Letters. 4. and Slant. The text appears in the graphics window. Roman. Choose Main Menu. See your Windows® documentation for more information about TrueType fonts. you are limited only by the number of TrueType fonts that are installed on your personal computer. Create. Box. you can scale them. The Drafting Globals dialog box displays. 9. Choose the Drafting Globals button. Creating geometric text using drafting parameters 1. 44 . Enter a starting point for the text. In the Letters area. Enter the Height for the letters in the Parameters area. see Scaling entities using a single scale factor and Scaling entities using multiple scale factors. Press [Esc] when you are satisfied with the placement of the text. Notes: Choose OK. You can use these files to create a string of geometric text. including blank space around the letters. 9. Next menu. ¨ The height of the actual letters may not match the value that you entered for letter height because the system scales the letters based on all of the information encoded into the TrueType font. Letters. For more information. Choose OK twice. 5. Each file contains a letter or character comprised of lines. Creating geometric text using pre-defined letter files Mastercam contains pre-defined letter files in four fonts: Block. ¨ When creating letter geometry using TrueType fonts. Next menu.

you can import it into the current file as many times as needed. From the Font pull-down menu. Choose OK. Pattern. 5. Note: The first four directories contain predefined letter files. enter the letter spacing. 8. or GE3 file. Vertical – Places the text top-to-bottom starting at the insertion point you select. Slant. MC8. select an alignment for the text as follows: ¨ ¨ Horizontal – Places the text left-to-right starting at the insertion point you select. ¨ Bottom of Arc . 3.2. or Other type fonts you want to use. if necessary. Create. Depending on the font you select. If prompted. save the edited file to a different directory. 7. Roman. enter the radius of the arc to write the letters along. the Alignment choices may or may not be active. 3. 1. Set additional parameters as follows: Scale – Sets the scale of the pattern entities. select one of the Block. ¨ Top of Arc – Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a clockwise direction. If you selected "Other" and have created your own fonts. If active. 4. MC7. Rather than recreate it each time you need it. This function is useful if you have a part such as a nut or bolt that you use repeatedly in your work. ¨ Choose Main Menu. or GE3) into the current file. If the Spacing parameter is active. MC7. Box. MC8. Next menu. In the Letters area. 45 . The Create Pattern dialog box displays. enter the letter height. Note: You can open the geometry file of any Mastercam letter/character and edit the file. 2.Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a counterclockwise direction. 10. 6. or select the Browse button to locate the file. and Mastercam creates the letters in the graphics window. each representing a different font. enter the letters to create as geometry. In the Height area. 9. The last option (Other) lets you select a directory where you can store customized letter files. Enter the name of an MC9. select ASCII File names to indicate that you have ASCII file names for the fonts. To prevent overwriting Mastercam’s pre-defined letter files. based on the Mastercam predefined font files. Click the mouse. Importing pattern entities into the current file You can import entities contained in an existing file (MC9.

7. see Working with groups. Next menu. 2. ¨ Use Main Color and Level . Creating bounding box geometry The Bounding Box dialog box lets you create points and lines to mark the center and extents of a bounding box. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Points – Creates points at the corners of the bounding box.g. Enter a point for the center of the pattern file. ¨ Each time you import a set of pattern entities into the current file. Mirror X – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s X axis relative to the construction origin. and translating a part to a new position in the graphics window. Leave the check box blank to maintain the original color and level of the pattern entities. This geometry can be useful for checking the overall dimensions of a part. defining alternate construction planes and origins.. Solids and dimensions can be. The Bounding Box dialog box displays. 46 . 4. 5. Select the check box to apply the current system color and level to the pattern entities. Mastercam identifies the entities as a group in the database for future use. Toolpaths cannot be imported. Mirror Y – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s Y axis relative to the construction origin. 1. Mastercam names the group using the pattern file name and a number to ensure the uniqueness of the group name. Choose Undo Last to remove pattern entities in the order in which they were created in the current Repeat step 5 to create the pattern entities at additional positions. 6. Notes: ¨ It is useful to store files containing pattern entities in a separate directory (e. Pattern files) so that they are easy to find when you use this function. For more information about groups. Set the Create parameters as follows: Lines – Creates lines along the edges of the bounding box. Choose OK. Note: The pattern entities are created in the current Cplane. Mirror Z – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s Z axis relative to the construction origin. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Bound box. which is a box-shaped boundary that is calculated around selected entities in the graphics window. Create.Sets the color and level of the pattern entities.¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Rotation – Sets the angle to rotate the pattern entities. ¨ ¨ file.

Surface. Entity association occurs between the following entities: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Between curve-generated surfaces and their reference curves Between offset surfaces and their generating surfaces Between trimmed surfaces and their generating (base) surfaces Between surface curves and the surfaces on which they lie Surface types Mastercam lets you create three types of surfaces: parametric. Swept. for Coons. from other surfaces. select the entities that the bounding box will surround and choose Done. or generating. and curve-generated. Select the All entities box if you want the bounding box to select all entities. If you did not select the All entities option. Center point – Creates a point at the center of the bounding box. you can choose from all three surface types. splines). if desired. Each surface type is described below. Choose OK. Click on the topics below for more information. and Blend surfaces. you can choose only Parametric and NURBS. 6. or from pre-defined shapes. 5.¨ 3. entity as the "child. think of the original. Each type describes a method that the system uses to calculate and store mathematical data about the surface. ¨ ¨ ¨ 4. Z – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the Z direction." which depends on the parent for its definition. Set the Expand parameters. SURFACES Creating and modifying surfaces The Surface menu gives you options for creating and modifying surfaces. arcs. NURBS. A surface is a 2D or 3D shape that has area. You can access the Surface menu by choosing Main Menu. However. as follows: X – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the X direction. For most Create. Create. or generated. Surface options. Surface associativity Entity association refers to the dependent relationship between one entity and a second entity or group of entities from which the first entity is generated. Parametric 47 . entity or entities as the "parent" and the resultant. Y – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the Y direction. which you create from curves (lines. To understand the relationship between dependent entities.

Converters function can be output to VDA only if they are bicubic (mathematical degree 3 by 3). surfaces that you bring in from another source using the File. However. it stores a direct reference back to the original curves. NURBS surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric surfaces. but with slightly more computing time Compatible with IGES conversion Can be output to VDA file format (if created in Mastercam) Note: Due to limitations with the VDA file format. A patch is an area of the surface bounded by four segments of generating curves.The parametric method of storing surface information is analogous to the parametric method of storing spline information. parametric surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ Compatible with IGES and VDA conversions Not associated with their generating curves Require a large amount of data storage NURBS The NURBS method of storing surface information is analogous to the NURBS method of storing spline information. a NURBS surface expands the string of control points in a second direction resulting in a grid. You can analyze a surface to determine if it is bicubic. curve-generated surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric or NURBS surfaces Associated with their generating curves Note: Curve-generated surfaces store exact data about their generating curves (rather than approximations). In addition. Create functions Creating a lofted surface The Loft option creates surfaces using a smooth blending of a minimum of two curves or chains of curves. a parametric surface expands each curve segment in a second direction resulting in a patch. In addition. However. In addition. 48 . ¨ Not associated with their generating curves Curve-generated When the system stores a surface as a curve-generated surface.

49 . When you select a curve or chain of curves. the system places a temporary arrow at the closest endpoint to show which end you have selected. 4. Select two or more curves or chains of curves. Press [Esc] to exit the function. it is important that you pay attention to where you select each curve or chain of curves because the selected ends of each pair of curves (curves one and two. which lets you match curves manually or by entity.) compose one edge of the surface. 5. In order to better match your curves or chains of curves. or point. then choose Done. Surface. 3. curves two and three. 2. branch. Set parameters on the Lofted Surface menu. Loft. then choose Do it to create the surface. Create. etc. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional lofted surfaces. node. you may want to select your curves using the Sync chaining method . Note: When you select curves for a loft surface.1. Choose Main Menu.

you must use Coons chaining. Note: For help on the menu options. Choose No (not to use automatic Coons chaining) on the Automatic Coons Chaining dialog box. Create. 50 . enter the number of patches to use in the ‘along’ direction. Select the CAD Settings tab and choose Ask each time. a type of chaining selection used only for this function. There are two types of Coons chaining: automatic and manual. Coons. 7. If at any time you want to regain access to this dialog box. Creating a Coons surface using manual Coons chaining 1. Choose Main Menu. 5. 4. 6. 8. then choose Done to complete chaining. Follow the system prompts to select the ‘along’ and ‘across’ chains. Set parameters on the Coons menu. In the prompt area. In order to create Coons surfaces. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to create additional Coons surfaces or press [Esc] to exit the function. Config. press [Alt+H]. as needed.Creating a Coons surface This option lets you create a surface from a grid of curves. 2. 3. Click on the topics below for more information. Choose Do it to create the Coons surface. Note: Mastercam eliminates this step for Coons surfaces that you create during the remainder of the Mastercam session if you check Don’ t ask again. Enter the number of patches to use in the ‘across’ direction. choose Screen. Surface.

If at any time you want to regain access to this dialog box. Note: For help on the menu options. Select the CAD Settings tab and choose Ask each time. 5. Screen. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. ¨ ¨ ¨ 4. as needed. Select two curves that intersect at the upper-left corner of the geometry. press [Alt+H]. 3. choose Screen. You can enable Coons Auto Chaining so that it is always used. You can also disable Coons Auto Chaining. Choose the CAD Settings tab.Creating a Coons surface using automatic Coons chaining 1. Set parameters on the Coons menu. Choose Main Menu. 4. Do one of the following: Check Yes to use Coons Auto Chaining by default. Choose Do it to create the Coons surface. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Choose Yes (to use automatic Coons chaining) on the Automatic Coons Chaining dialog box. 6. 2. Check No to disable Coons Auto Chaining. 51 . or make Mastercam ask the operator to approve its use each time. which forces the operator to use manual chaining. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to create additional Coons surfaces or press [Esc] to exit the function. The System Configuration dialog box opens. Configure. Enabling Coons Auto Chaining Coons Auto Chaining lets you define a Coons surface by selecting three entities: two curves that meet in the upper left corner and one curve in the lower right corner of the geometry. Create. Surface. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. 1. Check Ask each time to make Mastercam query the operator. 3. 7. Note: Mastercam eliminates this step for Coons surfaces that you create during the remainder of the Mastercam session if you check Don’ t ask again. 2. Coons. Select the end of a curve at the lower-right corner of the geometry. Config.

Along curves lie in rows that are parallel to the stepping direction. 52 . Note: If you don’t get the results you want using automatic Coons chaining. The system does not chain any entity that intersects at an angle larger than the minimum branch angle. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Automatic Coons Chaining Automatic Coons chaining lets you define a surface patch based on three entities: the two curves that meet in the upper-left corner and one curve in the lower-right corner of your geometry. try using manual Coons chaining. Across curves lie in columns that are perpendicular to the stepping direction. ¨ box. Mastercam uses a minimum branch angle to determine which entities to chain when there are intersecting entities. The default value for the minimum branch angle is 30 degrees. Coons patch boundaries are laid out in a grid of along and across curves. you must understand patch layout. Manual Coons Chaining In order to understand manual Coons chaining. followed by the across curves. you can enter a different value by choosing Angle from the menu area before selecting the entities that you want to chain. or patch. The following graphic shows the selection of two across curves and two along curves to form a square. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. However.Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. You define the along curves for the entire surface first.

The following graphic shows how multiple patches form a 3-by-3 grid that defines the Coons surface. 53 . Following these graphics you see a top view of the curves and the seven selection steps required to create the surface using manual Coons chaining. Note: Where you select each curve affects your results. Be consistent when selecting the start of each across and along curve. The following example shows graphics of the same curves and Coons surface used in the Automatic Coons Chaining example that required three selection steps.

54 .Note: This example shows a 1-by-2 grid. Coons surface blending methods The following graphics show a sample surface (shown below in isometric view) created using each of the Coons blending methods (shown in side view).

55 .Creating a ruled surface The Ruled option creates surfaces using a linear blending a minimum of two curves or chains of curves.

) compose one edge of the surface. Rectangle function creates a ruled surface based on the extents of a rectangle or rectangular shape. Select two or more curves or chains of curves. ¨ ¨ 4. Ruled. The Ruled surface parameters menu displays. Choose Tolerance. Choose Main Menu. or C (curve-generated). node. 2. Take one or more of the following actions: Toggle Type to P (parametric). 56 . it is important that you pay attention to where you select each curve or chain of curves because the selected ends of each pair of curves (curve one and two. branch. When you select a curve or chain of curves. you may want to select your curves using the Sync chaining method . Create. Notes: ¨ The Create. then press [Enter]. N (NURBS). which lets you match curves manually or by entity. ¨ When you select curves for a ruled surface.1. 3. etc. two and three. Choose Do it to create the surface. the system places a temporary arrow at the closest endpoint to show which end you have selected. such as an obround. then choose Done. type a value in the displayed text box. or point. Surface. In order to better match your curves or chains of curves.

3. then choose Do it to create the revolved surfaces. 4. the system displays a temporary arrow at one end of the axis to indicate the rotation direction. When you select the axis. The displays. as needed. The system revolves one or more selected chains of curves (profile entities) about a single line (axis of rotation). The Chaining Methods menu displays. choose Create. Select a line for the axis of rotation. 57 .Creating a revolved surface This option creates a surface that is circular in one direction. then choose Done. Set parameters on the Revolved Surface menu. From the Main Menu. Revolved. 2. 1. Surface. The following graphics identify a profile entity and axis of rotation and show them used in a full and partial rotation. Select one or more chain of curves.

The chains that you select to sweep are called ‘across’ chains. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Choose Main Menu. Creating a swept surface The Sweep function creates a surface by sweeping chains of curves along a path. 2. see Translate/Rotate Example. Select one or two ‘along’ chains of curves for the sweep path. The chains that define the path or trajectory of the sweep are called ‘ along’ chains. Note: If you selected more than one chain in step 2. 2. Mastercam calculates the angle from the surface’s end angle. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. This is known as a linear blend. Analyze. 58 . Select one or more ‘across’ chains of curves to define the cross-sections of the surface. Sweep. you do not have to choose Done . then choose Done. 3. 3. These chains define cross-sections of the resulting surface. toggle it to Y. 4. 1 across/2 along: Mastercam proportionally scales one section chain between two path chains. Change the sweep of the surface by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. Surface. ¨ ¨ 5.Editing the sweep of a revolved surface 1. ¨ 2 or more across/1 along: Mastercam transitions from one section chain to the next in the order in which you defined them while following one path chain. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces. Mastercam moves to the next step automatically. 6. you can select only one path chain. You have the option to translate or rotate the cross-section chain along the path. You can define a swept surface using the following combinations of across (section) and along (path) chains: ¨ 1 across/1 along: Mastercam sweeps one section chain along one path chain. In this case. For more information. Choose Main Menu. ¨ 1. Enter an angle value for Start Angle and/or End Angle. Select a curve-generated revolved surface. Choose OK to close the dialog box. see Surface types. then choose Done.

Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional swept surfaces. and translate/rotate settings. For more information. see Translate/Rotate Example. see Surface types. If necessary. In the prompt area. ¨ Toggle Trans/Rot to T to translate the section chain along the path chain or R to rotate the section chain as it is translated along the path chain. Mastercam displays the current surface error tolerance. 6. Note: This option is available only when one across chain and one along chain are selected. or press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: The surface tolerance determines how closely the resulting surface fits the along and across curves.4. 5. 1 across/1 along 59 . choose Type to toggle it to N (NURBS) or P (parametric). Note: The following graphics show three swept surfaces created using various combinations of across and along chains. In the prompt area. Choose Do it to create the Swept surface. ¨ To edit the surface type. type a tolerance value. then press [Enter]. use the Swept Surface menu to edit these settings by taking the following actions: ¨ To edit the surface error tolerance. surface type. For more information. choose Tolerance.

Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. 3. arcs. Draft. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. Choose Main Menu. To change this length. then enter a value for length in the prompt area. then choose Done. Create. 60 . Surface. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. splines). Toggle To plane to N. 4. choose Length. 2.2 across/1 along Creating draft surfaces using a defined length 1.

To change the draft direction. choose Length. choose View. choose View. splines). choose Curves. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). then enter a value for length in the prompt area. often with an angle. To change this value. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. Toggle To plane to N. Surface. or C for curvegenerated. 4. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area.5. 8. choose Angle. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). or spline) in a linear direction perpendicular to some view. Choose Main Menu. or to exit the function. arc. Draft. then choose Done. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). click on the following topics: Creating draft surfaces using a defined length 1. 6. To change this value. The draft surface extends to a defined length or plane. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. 6. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. then repeat steps 2 through 8. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. Create. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. 61 . Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). choose Angle. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. or driving out. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. 9. Choose P for parametric. 5. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. the shape of a curve (line. 7. For information on creating draft surfaces. arcs. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. For more information. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. press [Esc] About draft surfaces A draft surface is created by extruding. 2. To change this length. or degree of tilt. see Surface types. To change the draft direction. 3. N for NURBS.

9. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). Create. Note: For additional information regarding surface types. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. or to exit the function. press [Esc]. Surface. choose Curves. choose View. or to exit the function. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. Toggle To plane to Y. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. N for NURBS. To change the draft direction. choose Curves. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. Choose Main Menu. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. or C for curvegenerated. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). or C for curve-generated. 6. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. press [Esc]. Note: Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces in cases where the plane is defined at an angle other than perpendicular with respect to the draft direction. splines). Creating draft surfaces using a defined plane 1. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. 8. 5. To change this value. then repeat steps 2 through 8. 62 . 8. then repeat steps 2 through 8. Use the Define Plane menu to define where the draft surface(s) terminate. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. see Surface types. see Surface types. Choose P for parametric. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). 2. Toggle the Type option to P for parametric. arcs. 7. For more information. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. 4. Draft. then choose Done. N for NURBS. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. 3. 9.7. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. choose Angle. Choose Plane.

and position where the surface ends. draft angle.The pictures below show an example of a draft surface: Draft Surface menu options The Draft Surface menu options define the following characteristics of the draft surfaces that you’re creating: draft direction. Click on the menu below for more information. 63 . surface type.

then choose OK. Create. 2. then choose Done. 2. see Surface types. toggle it to Y. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. toggle it to Y. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. 4. arcs. Select a curve-generated draft surface. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces. 5. Enter a 3D Length value. Choose Main Menu. then choose OK. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. 64 . Enter an Angle value. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. Analyze. 2. Select a curve-generated draft surface. Editing the length of a draft surface 1. Analyze. Creating draft surfaces using a defined plane 1. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. 4. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu.Editing the angle of a draft surface 1. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 3. 3. Surface. splines). see Surface types. Choose Main Menu. Draft.

Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. choose View. or C for curvegenerated. These models are fully closed and appear to be solid when shading is turned on. choose Curves. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. Choose Main Menu. see Surface types. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). then enter a value for length in the prompt area. With the exception of extruded surface models. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. 6. Next menu. Toggle To plane to N. primitive surfaces are not based on curve geometry. Create. Creating a cylinder-shaped primitive surface model 1. choose Length. you must enter a value in the prompt area. To change this length. Cylinder. then repeat steps 2 through 8. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. 5. Surface. N for NURBS. 8. or to exit the function. Create. Choose P for parametric. choose Axis. such as a block or sphere. press [Alt+H]. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. press [Esc]. The Primitive Surfaces menu gives you options for creating different types of primitive surface models. Click on the topics below for more information. After choosing either option. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. Surface. Primitive. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Cylinder menu as follows: ¨ To set the cylinder’s size. ¨ To set the cylinder’s orientation. 3. 4. choose Angle. Next menu. For more information. To change the draft direction. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. 2. choose Height and Radius. 7. For help on this menu. Creating surfaces in pre-defined (primitive) shapes A primitive surface model is composed of one or more NURBS surfaces in a pre-defined shape. Mastercam creates a cylindershaped surface model in the graphics window. To change this value. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). 65 .Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. 9. Primitive.

Choose Main Menu. ¨ To set the cylinder’s attributes. choose Base point. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Cone menu as follows: ¨ To set the cone’s size. For help on this menu. Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. In the prompt area. choose Sweep angle. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cylinder’s bottom face. Create. After choosing any of these options. Btm radius. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Primitive. Creating a cone-shaped primitive surface model 1. you must enter a value in the prompt area. In the prompt area. ¨ To set the cone’s sweep. ¨ To set the cone’s position. choose Attributes. enter a value for sweep angle. choose Sweep angle. 3. choose Axis. the cone will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. enter a value for sweep angle. the cylinder will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. press [Alt+H]. choose Height. ¨ To set the cone’s attributes. Note: You can create a partial cone by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. ¨ To set the cylinder’s sweep. and Taper angle. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. choose Base point. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. Surface. 3. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the cone. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the cylinder. ¨ To set the cone’s orientation. Cone. Note: By default. Next menu. choose Attributes. 2. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cone’s bottom face. 66 . Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model.¨ To set the cylinder’s position. Note: By default. Note: You can create a partial cylinder by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the cylinder. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the cone. Mastercam creates a coneshaped surface model in the graphics window. Top radius.

Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Torus menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the torus. Enter two points in the graphics window for opposing corners of the block’s bottom face. choose Maj radius and Min radius. 3. Create. choose Attributes.Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. press [Alt+H]. ¨ To set the block’s orientation. Mastercam creates a torus (doughnut)-shaped surface model in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. Note: By default. Creating a torus-shaped primitive surface model 1. Surface. Block. choose Axis (H) and Axis (L). Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Block menu as follows: ¨ To set the block’s size. Primitive. width. 67 . ¨ To set the block’s position and 2D size in one step. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Create. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them Creating a block-shaped primitive surface model 1. Next menu. Length. 2. For help on this menu. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axes that correspond to the block ’s height and length. 2. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. After choosing either of these options. Next menu. Width. Mastercam updates length. choose Height. and Taper angle. ¨ To set the block’s attributes. choose Axis. Choose Main Menu. The block’s height is unchanged. choose Base point. ¨ To set the block’s position. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the block about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. Primitive. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the block’s bottom face. Surface. the block will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Mastercam creates a blockshaped surface model in the graphics window. Torus. press [Alt+H]. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the block. ¨ To set the orientation of the torus. and base point. you must enter a value in the prompt area. choose Corners. For help on this menu. After choosing any of these option.

Next menu. Create. Note: By default. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. ¨ To set the sphere’s attributes. Primitive. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. choose Sweep angle. In the prompt area. 2. the of the torus will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Creating a sphere-shaped primitive surface model 1. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the sphere. 3. the sphere will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. 68 . In the prompt area.¨ To set the position of the torus. choose Attributes. choose Base point. Mastercam creates a sphereshaped surface model in the graphics window. choose Axis. then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the sphere. choose Base point. For help on this menu. ¨ To set the attributes of the torus. ¨ To set the sweep of the torus. Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the torus. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. ¨ To set the sphere’s sweep. enter a value for sweep angle. enter a value for sweep angle. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. press [Alt+H]. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the sphere. ¨ To set the sphere’s position. Note: You can create a partial torus by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. 3. Note: You can create a partial sphere by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. Note: By default. ¨ To set the sphere’s orientation. choose Radius. ¨ Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Sphere menu as follows: To set the sphere’s size. choose Sweep angle. choose Attributes. Surface. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the torus. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the torus’ hole. Sphere.

choose Height. Extrusion Select one chain of curves. ¨ To set the extrusion’s position. Note: If you select a spline. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the extrusion about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area. Mastercam creates a separate NURBS surface for each solid face in your selection. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. Creating an extruded primitive surface model Mastercam creates an extruded primitive surface model by driving out the shape of a selected chain of curves in a perpendicular direction. choose Attributes. see Creating solids in pre-defined (primitive) shapes. Next menu. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Extrusion menu as follows: ¨ To set the extrusion’s size. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type.Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. 69 . If prompted. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Choose Main Menu. which creates actual solid bodies. ¨ To set the extrusion’s attributes. it must be closed. 1. 3. and Taper angle. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the extrusion’s bottom face. the extrusion will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. ¨ To set the extrusion’s orientation. Note: Choosing No cancels the selection and exits the function. choose Yes to close the chain of curves. Primitive. Create. 4. For more information. Extracting surfaces from solids You can use solids to extract surface information. Note: By default. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. press [Alt+H]. 2. Scale. For help on this menu. Note: This functionality is similar to the Primitives function offered with the Mastercam Solids product. Offset. 5. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the extruded surface model. After choosing any of these options. choose Axis. Mastercam closes the chain by drawing a straight line between the two open endpoints. you must enter a value in the prompt area. choose Base point. Mastercam drives the shape of the curves in a perpendicular direction to create the surface model. Surface.

In the prompt area. Surface. 4. Modify functions Creating fillet surfaces The Fillet menu gives you options for constructing fillet surfaces. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. lies on a curve or chain of curves at a rail location. The solids are unchanged. based on how it is constructed. 1. as needed.1. From solid. Creating a fillet surface between a curve and a surface This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. Create. each of which has a defined radius. Choose Main Menu. In the prompt area. enter a value for radius. Fillet. press [Alt+H]. then choose Done to extract the surfaces. 2. then choose Done. Create. then choose OK to set the direction. Define the tangent plane. Set parameters on the Plane/Surface menu. 3. Curve/surf. then choose Done. Select one or more faces and/or whole solid bodies. 1. 3. Surface. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the plane’s normal arrow. Select one or more surfaces. Creating a fillet surface between a plane and a surface This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. 70 . Create. 6. Note: For help on the Plane/Surface menu options. Choose Main Menu. Next menu. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces. Note: The radius that you enter should be an average representation of the variable radii that you enter if you vary the radius along the surface in the following step. Fillet. Note: The arrow points to the side of the plane that you want the fillet surfaces to be tangent to. and is tangent to one or more selected surfaces. 5. Select one or more surfaces. A fillet surface is mathematically equivalent to a series of arcs and is tangent to one or two surfaces. Create. enter a value for the radius of the fillet surfaces. Plane/surf. 2. Surface. Choose Main Menu. The Define Plane menu displays. Fillet. each of which is tangent to a plane and a surface. Surface. if necessary. 2.

Select one or more chains of curves. you select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set of surfaces. 71 . Select one or more surfaces for the second set of surfaces. select the surfaces to delete. Note: You receive this prompt only if you selected the Fillet Both Sides check box on the Surface-Surface Fillet dialog box and the system finds more than one solution. If. 1. Select one or more surfaces for the first set of surfaces. 5. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces. For example. 2. the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the floor. Create. but it must contain at least two surfaces. then choose Done. You can select one set. When Mastercam offsets a surface. Note: The radius that you enter should be an average representation of the variable radii that you enter if you vary the radius along the surface in the following step.4. Note: For help on the Surface/Surface menu options. When you choose this option. 4. press [Alt+H]. however. Surface. Create. each of which is tangent to two surfaces. Fillet. Creating a fillet surface between two surfaces This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. Surface. Note: For help on the Curve/Surface menu options. Choose Main Menu. then press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. having only one set of surfaces could prove more time consuming. Indicate which side of the curves to use to create the fillet surfaces by choosing Left or Right with relation to the direction of the curve. if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor all in a single set. the system looks for intersections between all walls and the floor. then choose Done. With one set. The system attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each surface in the first set with each surface in the second set. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces. Offsetting surfaces This function offsets one or more surfaces by a distance and a direction relative to the surface normal direction of each selected surface. 5. it creates the offset surface as a separate surface from the original surface. press [Alt+H]. 1. In the prompt area. Surf/surf. 6. In some cases. If prompted. the system prompts you to select two sets of surfaces. then choose Done. 3. enter a value for radius. Set parameters on the Surface/Surface Fillet Surface menu. Set parameters on the Curve/Surface Fillet Surface menu. 6. the system attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each surface in the set with every other surface in the set. Offset.

4. For more information. In the prompt area.2. then select one or more surface curves in the graphics window. To change the offset distance. and extending surfaces. B to blank the surfaces. press [Alt+H] from the menu. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. Trimming surfaces to curves This function trims surfaces to curves (lines. Choose Options. Surface or by choosing Main Menu. Click on the topics below for more information. Select a curve or chains of curves to use to trim the surfaces. arcs. then choose Done. To check the surface normal directions. then choose Done. 6. or D to delete the surfaces. and you can keep. Trim. untrimming. or delete the original (base) surface. 3. 2. 5. A negative value offsets the surfaces in the negative surface normal direction. Mastercam displays the Offset menu. choose Offset dist. You can check the normal direction of one or all surfaces in the selection. Modify. then choose OK. Indicate what to do with the original surfaces once the offset surfaces have been created. Trim/extend. arcs. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. blank. 4. if necessary. Mastercam displays the Check Surface Normals menu. Surface. A positive value offsets the surfaces in the positive surface normal direction. Select one or more surfaces to trim. The default offset values display in the prompt area. Set the remaining parameters on the Trim to Curves menu. Note: To trim the surfaces to surface curves instead of using the trimming curves selected in step 3. choose Check norms. Toggle Dispose to K to keep the surfaces. Choose Main Menu. However. Note: You can enter a positive or negative value. then choose Do it. 5. Surface. 1. Trim. choose Surf crvs. enter a new value for the distance to offset the surfaces. Trimming surfaces The Trim or Extend Surface menu gives you options for trimming. Mastercam projects them onto the surfaces in order to calculate the intersection where the surface will be trimmed. then choose Done. you can replace these trimming curves with surface curves in step 5. Choose Do it to create the offset surfaces. Set the step method and trimming parameters. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. and splines or surface curves) If the trimming curves do not lie directly on the surfaces. and/or splines as the trimming curves in this step. 3. Create. Select one or more surfaces to offset. You can access the Trim or Extend menu by choosing Main Menu. 72 . Modify. When Mastercam trims a surface. Note: You must select lines. To curves.

Modify. which may produce unintended results. Surface. To curves. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. The arrow on the graphic indicates the side that Mastercam will keep after trimming. 73 . Select one or more surfaces to trim. 4. then choose Done. Define the trimming plane. 8. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the arrow. Create. 3. Take one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ Choose OK to keep the side that the arrow currently points to. 2. Notes: ¨ This function is similar to the Create. Choose Main Menu. or delete the original (base) surface.6. However. blank. 1. Trim/extend. 7. When Mastercam trims a surface. Note: Avoid selecting the outer boundary of the surface. Trim. and you can keep. Project function. Mastercam displays an arrow on the surface. To plane. Trimming surfaces to a plane This function trims surfaces to a plane. in this function no curves are created. The following graphics show a surface trimmed by a circle. Select a highlighted surface. Surface. which gives you the option to trim surfaces to projected curves. then click. then choose OK. Curve. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. ¨ ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Mastercam displays a temporary graphic of the plane in the graphics window. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

and you can keep. in this function no curves are created. To plane. Choose Main Menu. blank. Set the step method and trimming parameters. Select one or more surfaces for the first set of surfaces. Create. Trimming surfaces to surfaces This function looks for intersections between two sets of surfaces. Choose Options. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. Modify. However. 2. 6. Notes: ¨ This function is similar to the Create. which gives you the option to trim surfaces to a plane. then choose Done. To surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Trim. Choose Do it to trim the surfaces. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. Surface. or delete the original (base) surface. 7. Curve. ¨ ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Slice function. 1. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. then choose OK. The following graphics show a rectangular surface trimmed to a plane. and trims one or both of the sets of surfaces. one of which must contain only one surface. Trim/extend.5. When Mastercam trims a surface. Surface. 74 .

Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. However. Set the step method and trimming parameters. Create. Intersect function. select a surface from the first set. you must select only one surface in this step. then choose Done. then take one of the following actions: ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim only the first set of surfaces. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 75 . ¨ This function is similar to the Create. Note: If you selected more than one surface in step 2. ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim only the second set of surfaces. select a surface from the second set. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose OK. Repeat for a surface from the second set. select a surface from the first set. ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim both sets of surfaces. Note: Avoid selecting the outer boundary of the surface. Choose Do it. Choose Options. which may produce unintended results. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. Curve. Surface. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. 4. then click. 5. which gives you the option to trim two sets of surfaces to their intersections. ¨ The following graphics show one surface trimmed to its intersection with another surface. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. then click. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method.3. To surfaces. in this function no curves are created. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of surfaces. then click. Notes: ¨ Mastercam trims the surfaces based on the section of the selected surface(s) that you keep in step 5. 6. Trim/extend.

Create. Mastercam calculates (but does not create) a curve between the two open endpoints for the purpose of defining the closed boundary. Nested chains form holes in the flat boundary surface. 1. 4. 6. Set the step method. If you selected any open chains in step 3. see Manual chaining.Creating a trimmed surface within a flat boundary This function creates a trimmed NURBS surface within a flat boundary defined by chain(s) of curves or surface edges. which defines the outer boundary of the surface. Note: If you choose Yes. 3. Choose Options. 2. Additional chains must be nested within this boundary. Choose Yes to close the chains or No to remove the open chains from calculation of the trimmed surface. Modify. it creates and blanks an untrimmed base (parent) surface. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. Surface. When Mastercam trims a surface to the boundary. Flat bndy. Trim/extend. Surface. then choose OK. Choose Main Menu. For information on manual chaining. Choose Done to return to the Flat Boundary menu. Use the chaining methods on the Flat Boundary menu to select one or more planar chains of curves. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. ¨ You can use the Manual chaining method to select surface edges and surface curves. Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. there must be one outermost chain. 5. Mastercam displays the message shown below. Trim. 76 . Choose Do it to create the flat boundary surface. Flat bndy. Notes: ¨ If selecting multiple chains.

Choose Main Menu. ¨ Choose Main Menu. When the system breaks the selected surface. Take one of the following actions: To untrim a surface by deleting it and unblanking its untrimmed base surface. Note: You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Split. Select a surface in the graphics window. 5. Trim. Choose OK to split the surface along the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the surface) or choose Flip to reverse the direction before choosing OK. 77 . Untrim. Untrimming a surface 1. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to split additional surfaces. Surface. Modify. type [S] to activate snapping. then click. Split. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point. Modify. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the split to pass through on the surface (the fixed position). set Dispose to D. Surface. Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. 3. Splitting a surface into two trimmed surfaces This function breaks a surface at a fixed position along one of the surface directions. Create.¨ The following graphics show the resulting surface when all three chains are selected. 4. 2. 6. 2. Surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 1. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. then click. Trim/extend. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. Trim. it creates two trimmed surfaces and blanks the original surface. The flat boundary surface has two holes from the nested chains.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Mastercam returns its base surface to the graphics window and disposes of the trimmed surface according to the selection made in step 2. ¨ To return a base surface to the graphics window and blank the trimmed surface. 2. Choose Main Menu. 4. set Dispose to K. Removing a trimmed boundary from a surface The Remove Boundary function lets you fill holes in a trimmed surface. Mastercam closes it by removing the trimmed surface and replacing it with the untrimmed base surface. or press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: To see the arrow. Untrim. or No to fill only the selected hole. If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface contains multiple internal boundaries. 3. set Dispose to B. Mastercam displays the following prompt: Choose Yes to fill all of the internal holes. You do not receive this prompt. Trim/extend. Remove bndy. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to untrim additional surfaces. you may need to switch to isometric view (Gview. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. 5. 4. Create. then left-click. Mastercam closes the hole by removing the trimmed boundary. Surface. Modify. For each hole that you select to fill. 78 . Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary.¨ To return a base surface to the graphics window and keep the trimmed surface visible in the graphics window. You can fill internal holes (those that lie completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and external holes (those that lie along the outer boundary of the surface). If the trimmed surface contains only one hole. Note: You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to remove trimmed boundaries from additional surfaces. Slide the base of the arrow to a trimmed boundary that you want to fill. Trim. Mastercam closes the hole by removing the boundary. Isometric). Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Surface.

79 . This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface of a flat boundary surface always extends beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface. ¨ This function differs from the Fill Holes function in which Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces to fill the holes. Remove bndy. as shown in the following example. no trimmed boundaries are removed. Surface. For more information. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary. Trim/extend. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). Create. as shown in the following example. see the related topics below. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does not touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked).Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu.

2. Note: To see the arrow. Surface. or No to fill only the selected hole. 80 .Filling a trimmed boundary in a surface The Fill Holes function lets you fill holes in a trimmed surface. Fill holes. If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface contains multiple internal boundaries. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam creates a trimmed surface within the boundary defined by the hole. Trim. 1. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to fill holes in additional surfaces. Mastercam displays the following prompt: Choose Yes to fill all of the internal holes. Slide the base of the arrow to a trimmed boundary that you want to fill. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Modify. or press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. you may need to switch to isometric view (Gview. 4. then left-click. Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary. For each hole that you select to fill. You can fill internal holes (those that lie completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and external holes (those that lie along the trimmed outer boundary of the surface). Isometric). You do not receive this prompt. Mastercam closes the hole by creating a trimmed surface within it. 3.

Surface. Create. Trim/extend. as shown in the following example. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary. For more information. as shown in the following example. see the related topics below. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does not touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries. 81 . Fill holes.Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. ¨ This function differs from the Remove Boundary function in which Mastercam removes the trimmed boundaries but nothing new is created. This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface of a flat boundary surface always extends beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface.

Set To plane to N. or delete the original surface.Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface. Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. Surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. 9. 8. Extend. 6. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Modify. as needed. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. ¨ When possible. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Surface. Trim/extend. Choose Length. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. 3. 10. For example. In the prompt area. In such cases. NURBS. When Mastercam extends a surface. Extend. enter the length to extend the surface. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length. 4. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. 5. 1. 82 . However. and you can choose to keep. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Select a surface in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. or curve-generated) as the original surface. 7. 2. then click. blank. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. Choose Do it to extend the surface.

Choose Do it to extend the surface. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. When Mastercam extends a surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. blank. Set Linear to Y. 8. Surface. 7. then click. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Choose Plane. Select a surface in the graphics window. 3. Set To plane to Y. and you can choose to keep. 9. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. or delete the original surface. Surface. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. When Mastercam extends a surface. Choose Main Menu. or curve-generated) as the original surface. However. 1. Extend. and you can choose to keep. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to.Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. or delete the original surface. 4. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface. Extend. 5. For example. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Create. 6. Modify. as needed. Trim/extend. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. NURBS. blank. ¨ When possible. In such cases. 83 . Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface.

Choose Main Menu. 4. blank. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length.1. Surface. 2. Trim/extend. Choose Main Menu. Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. Set Linear to Y. or curve-generated) as the original surface. Surface. Extend. 7. Surface. enter the length to extend the surface. Choose Do it to extend the surface. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. 84 . 6. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. 3. then click. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. In such cases. ¨ When possible. Set To plane to Y. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Choose Plane. 3. Choose Length. Modify. When Mastercam extends a surface. as needed. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Extend. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to. and you can choose to keep. Set To plane to N. NURBS. 8. Select a surface in the graphics window. 5. 4. 9. Modify. However. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. For example. 2. In the prompt area. or delete the original surface. Create. 10. 1. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. Extend. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated.

type [S] to activate snapping. 9. Notes: ¨ ¨ Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Set parameters on the 2 Surface Blending menu. as needed. 85 . or curve-generated) as the original surface. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. However. Mastercam creates a temporary blending spline on the surface. 8.5. Trim/extend. 3. NURBS. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. if necessary. Select a surface. 6. In such cases. 2 surf blnd. Choose Flip to reverse the blend direction. Note: To receive help on the menu options. Surface. see Blend direction example. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. then choose OK to set the direction. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for a second surface. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. Blending two surfaces Mastercam blends two surfaces by creating a third surface that is tangent to the first two surfaces. Mastercam creates a temporary surface between the two blending splines and displays the 2 Surface Blending menu. Next menu. then click to set the blend location. 6. 1. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. 4. Create. press [Alt+H]. This function is useful for eliminating unwanted features in order to smooth out part of a surface model. Note: To select a blend location at an existing point. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. as needed. 2. Move the base of the arrow over the desired point. then left-click. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. then click. Choose Main Menu. Define the location and width of the tangent surface: Move the base of the arrow to the location where you want to blend the new surface to the existing surface. Choose Do it to extend the surface. Create. 7. Surface. Note: For an example of how the blend direction affects the resulting surface. You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Select a surface in the graphics window. 5. then choose Do it to create the blend surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. Extend. ¨ When possible. Press [Esc] to exit the function. For example.

then choose Do it to create the blend surface. 2. For more information. Note: To select a blend location at an existing point. Choose Main Menu. Note: To receive help on the menu options." It is similar to blending three surfaces. 6. Next menu. Create. Mastercam creates a three-sided blend surface. 1. Blending three intersecting fillet surfaces Mastercam blends three intersecting fillet surfaces by creating one or more surfaces that are tangent to the first three surfaces. as needed. 1. see Adjusting the boundaries of a fillet blend surface.Blending three surfaces Mastercam blends three surfaces by creating a fourth surface that is tangent to the first three surfaces. Set parameters on the 3 Fillet Blend menu. Fillet blnd. 5. Dispose. Note: The selected geometry determines the number of surfaces that the system creates. ¨ Toggle Trim. 3 surf blnd. as needed. Otherwise. 2. This function is useful for rounding the corners of a filleted "box. as well as whether the resulting surfaces are trimmed or untrimmed. Surface. type [S] to activate snapping. 86 . Surface. then click to set the blend location. Note: For an example of how the blend direction affects the resulting surface. However. Define the location and width of the tangent surface: Move the base of the arrow to the location where you want to blend the new surface to the existing surface. Move the base of the arrow over the desired point. Mastercam creates a temporary blending spline on the surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. then choose OK to set the direction. Next menu. Choose Flip to reverse the blend direction. If the Sides parameter is set to 3. Mastercam creates a temporary surface between the three blending splines and displays the 3 Surface Blending menu. Create. This function is useful for eliminating unwanted features in order to smooth out part of a surface model. 3. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for two additional surfaces. Select a surface. and Edge spl to new settings. then left-click. Choose Main Menu. with this option Mastercam automatically calculates the location where the blend surface(s) are tangent to the fillet surfaces. see Blend direction example. 4. press [Alt+H]. then select three fillet surfaces. if necessary. take one of the following actions: ¨ Manually adjust one or more of the boundaries. as needed. Set parameters on the 3 Surface Blending menu.

Each type describes a method that the system uses to calculate and store mathematical data about the surface. Surface options. think of the original. However. NURBS. and Blend surfaces." which depends on the parent for its definition.¨ Choose Select to toggle Sides to a new setting and/or reselect the three fillet surfaces that you want to blend. or generating. but with slightly more computing time Compatible with IGES conversion 87 Compatible with IGES and VDA conversions Not associated with their generating curves Require a large amount of data storage . you can choose from all three surface types. a parametric surface expands each curve segment in a second direction resulting in a patch. NURBS surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric surfaces. In addition. Parametric The parametric method of storing surface information is analogous to the parametric method of storing spline information. and curve-generated. To understand the relationship between dependent entities. Entity association occurs between the following entities: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Between curve-generated surfaces and their reference curves Between offset surfaces and their generating surfaces Between trimmed surfaces and their generating (base) surfaces Between surface curves and the surfaces on which they lie Surface types Mastercam lets you create three types of surfaces: parametric. Surface associativity Entity association refers to the dependent relationship between one entity and a second entity or group of entities from which the first entity is generated. Each surface type is described below. Choose Do it to create the six-sided fillet blend surface. parametric surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ NURBS The NURBS method of storing surface information is analogous to the NURBS method of storing spline information. you can choose only Parametric and NURBS. a NURBS surface expands the string of control points in a second direction resulting in a grid. entity or entities as the "parent" and the resultant. For most Create. for Coons. or generated. However. However. Swept. entity as the "child. In addition. 3. A patch is an area of the surface bounded by four segments of generating curves.

The System Configuration dialog box opens. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. also the surfaces defined from them. ¨ Not associated with their generating curves Curve-generated When the system stores a surface as a curve-generated surface. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. 4. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. You can analyze a surface to determine if it is bicubic. you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. 3. Configure. surfaces that you bring in from another source using the File. it stores a direct reference back to the original curves. curve-generated surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric or NURBS surfaces Associated with their generating curves Note: Curve-generated surfaces store exact data about their generating curves (rather than approximations). Converters function can be output to VDA only if they are bicubic (mathematical degree 3 by 3). ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points. Choose the CAD Settings tab. Screen. Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. See Surface types for more information on surface types. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. 88 . Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted. also the surfaces defined from them. 1. In addition. 2.¨ Can be output to VDA file format (if created in Mastercam) Note: Due to limitations with the VDA file format. The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. While these types will be generated by default.

6. Creating curves on surfaces and solids The Curve menu gives you options for creating lines. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. 4. 2. and Density) are shown in the prompt area. splines on surfaces and solids and for creating surface curves on surfaces.Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose Options. You can access the Surface Display menu by choosing Main Menu. ¨ box. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Choose OK to create a curve in the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the selected surface) or Both to create a curve in both directions. Back color. Creating constant parameter curves on a surface You can create a curve in one or both surface directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on the surface. 89 . 5. Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional curves. Curve. then click. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. Create. Click on the topics below for more information. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the curve to pass through on the surface (the fixed position). 3. type [S] to activate snapping. Choose Main Menu. Select a surface in the graphics window. Note: You can choose Flip to reverse the current direction before choosing OK. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Setting the display of surfaces and solids The Surface Display menu gives you options for specifying how surfaces and solids appear in the graphics window. Select a step method and set the types of curves to create. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. Create. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Curve. arcs. Surf disp. While this menu is displayed. Screen. 1. current surface display settings (Show back. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. then choose OK. then click. Const param.

Select a step method. face. one in each direction. Note: You can choose Flip to reverse the current direction before choosing OK. 1. Const param. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. type [S] to activate snapping. Choose Solid face. Choose OK to create a curve in the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the selected face) or Both to create a curve in both directions. Choose OK. then click. 2. 90 . Curve. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the solid Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. Choose Options. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. 3. 5. Create.7. then check Splines and select a spline type. the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point. The point where the constant parameter curves intersect is the fixed position. Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. then click. Select a solid face in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. 4. 7. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. Creating constant parameter curves on a solid face You can create a curve in one or both solid face directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on the face. The red lines represent the two constant parameter curves created on the surface. In the following example. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the curve to pass through on the solid face (the fixed position). or constant parameter.

8.

Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following example, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent the two constant parameter curves created on the surface, one in each direction. The point where the constant parameter curves intersect is the fixed position, or constant parameter.

Creating parametric splines along the patch boundaries of a parametric surface 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Patch bndy. Select a parametric surface. Mastercam creates parametric splines along the patch boundaries. Repeat step 2 to create splines along the patch boundaries of additional surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: This function does not work with bicubic (degree 3, or order 4) parametric surfaces, such as those created with the Create, Rectangle function.

Creating flowline curves on a surface This function creates multiple curves on a surface in one direction of the surface. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Flowline. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface.

3. Select the curve direction: Choose OK to accept the current direction or choose Flip to reverse the direction, then choose OK. 4. The prompt area reflects the current method used to calculate the number of curves that Mastercam will create on the surface. To change the calculation method, choose Number, Dist(ance), or Toler(ance), then enter a value in the prompt area. 5. Choose Options. Select a step method and set the types of curves to create, then choose OK.

91

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. 6. 7. 8. Choose Do it to create the curves. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the option.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following examples, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent flowline curves created on the surface in different directions.

Creating flowline curves on a solid face

This function creates multiple curves on a solid face in one direction of the solid face. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Flowline. Choose Solid face. Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the face.

4. Select the curve direction: Choose OK to accept the current direction or choose Flip to reverse the direction, then choose OK. 5. The prompt area reflects the current method used to calculate the number of curves that Mastercam will create on the surface. To change the calculation method, choose Number, Dist(ance), or Toler(ance), then enter a value in the prompt area. 6. Choose Options. Select a step method, then check Splines and select a spline type. Choose OK.

92

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. 7. 8. 9. Choose Do it to create the curves Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the option.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following examples, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent flowline curves created on the surface in different directions. Creating a curve at any position on a surface 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Dynamic. Choose Options. Set the type of entities to create, then choose OK. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Move the base of the arrow to position the first endpoint of the curve on the surface, then click.

Note: To set the endpoint at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor crosshairs over the point, then click. 5. Repeat step 4 to enter additional points through which you want the curve to pass.

Note: The resulting curve passes through the points in the order you enter them. You must enter a minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the curve. 6. 7. 8. Notes: ¨ If you choose to create a spline in step 2, the points that you enter in steps 4 and 5 represent nodes where the spline lies directly on the surface. ¨ If you choose to create a surface curve in step 2, it lies completely on the surface. Creating a spline at any position on a solid face 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Dynamic. Choose Options. Check Splines, select a spline type, then choose OK. Choose Solid face. 93 Press [Esc] to create the curve. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

4. 5.

Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the face. Move the base of the arrow to position the first endpoint of the spline on the face, then click.

Note: To set the endpoint at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor crosshairs over the point, then click. 6. Repeat step 5 to enter additional points through which you want the spline to pass.

Note: The resulting spline passes through the points in the order you enter them. You must enter a minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the spline. 7. 8. 9. Press [Esc] to create the spline and exit the function. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to create additional splines. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The points that you enter in steps 5 and 6 represent nodes where the resulting spline lies directly on the solid face.

Creating curves at the intersections of a slice plane with surfaces and solids This function slices selected surfaces and solids with a plane and creates curves along the intersections of the plane with the selected entities. You also have options to create the curves at offset positions, to create curves at a defined spacing interval from the intersections, and to trim the surfaces to the resulting curves. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Slice. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

3. Define the slice plane. Mastercam displays a temporary graphic of the plane in the graphics window. 4. Set parameters on the Slice Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. 5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click. 6. Note: ¨ If trimming is active, Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface, try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

94

¨ The first graphic shows a selected surface and the slice plane that intersects it. The second graphic shows the resulting curve (red) on the surface, which has been trimmed back to the curve.

Creating curves at the intersections of two sets of surfaces and solids This function creates curves at the intersections between two sets of surfaces and solids. Mastercam pairs each entity in the first set with each entity in the second set and creates curves at the intersecting locations. 1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Intersect.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces for the first set of entities, then choose Done. Note: You can select solids and solid faces in the first set only. 3. 4. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of entities, then choose Done. Set parameters on the Intersection Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. 5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click. If prompted again, repeat for a second surface. 95

try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. you must select two sets of surfaces and one set must contain only one surface. 96 . Mastercam trims both sets of surfaces based on the selections you make in step 5. In certain instances. ¨ If trimming is active. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. If. ¨ If you choose to create surface curves. the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the floor. you select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set of surfaces. In this case. the system looks for intersections between all walls and the floor. one on each of the intersecting surfaces. having only one set of surfaces could prove more time consuming. if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor in one set. Notes: Press [Esc] to exit the function. ¨ The first graphic shows two shaded intersecting surfaces. The second graphic shows the same surfaces in wireframe view. The red lines are the curves that were created along the surface intersections. however. Mastercam creates two surface curves for each intersection.6. Mastercam attempts to create curves by pairing each surface in the set with every other surface in the set. however. you may select them in one set containing a minimum of two surfaces. ¨ If you choose to intersect only surfaces. ¨ In order to trim surfaces to the intersection curves. For example.

then select the view to use to generate the parting line curves.Projecting curves onto surfaces and solids 1. Curve. Create. and/or solid faces. Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. Curve. solids. 2. If prompted. 2. Choose View. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. Create. then choose Done. solids. ¨ In the following graphic. 4. select a highlighted surface to trim. Creating parting line curves on surfaces and solids 1. 3. Choose Main Menu. then choose Do it to project the curves. 6. and/or solid faces. Project. 3. the green circle has been projected onto the surface. Select one or more surfaces. Select one or more chains of curves to project. Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Set parameters on the Projection Curve menu. then choose Done. The red circle is the resulting curve. Choose Main Menu. then click. Notes: ¨ If trimming is active. 5. then choose Done. Select one or more surfaces. Part line. 97 . Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming.

3. Select a Step Method and Spline Type. Choose Options. 5. 5. select a highlighted surface to trim. One edge. 6. Set the remaining parameters on the Parting Line Curve menu. where the surface wraps out of view. Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. enter a break angle value. 98 . the red line represents the parting line curve. ¨ In the following graphic. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming. Curve. In the prompt area. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. Choose Main Menu. Notes: ¨ If trimming is active. then choose Do it to create the curves. 2. The green lines represent the front of the surface (positive surface normal). 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. If prompted. then click to create the curve. Creating a curve along one edge of a surface 1. Create. Note: This step is necessary only when creating curves along trimmed surfaces. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. then click. then choose OK.4. Choose Break angle. Move the base of the arrow to the surface edge where you want to create the curve. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. ¨ This function is often used with mold-making. and the gray lines represent the back of the surface (negative surface normal).

Choose Do it to create the curves. Mastercam outputs an arc. Mastercam creates a curve on the selected edge. 7. Choose Break angle. then choose Done. 4. Mastercam outputs a line. yet exact. 99 . Creating curves along all edges of selected surfaces and solids 1. and/or solid faces. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a solid edge in the graphics window. Repeat step 3 to create additional curves along solid edges. enter a break angle value. solids. then choose Done. 2. Note: This step is necessary only when creating curves along trimmed surfaces.6. Create. Note: Mastercam creates a line. if the resulting curve is linear. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional curves along surface edges. arc. 3. Choose Main Menu. representation of the solid edge. Note: The other One Edge Curve menu options pertain to creating curves along surface edges and do not need to be set when creating curves on solid edges. However. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose From solid from the One Edge Curve menu. then choose OK. Choose Options. Curve. Note: Mastercam creates a NURBS or parametric spline (depending on the spline type you selected in step 2). 6. Curve. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. 5. Select one or more surfaces. and if the resulting curve is round. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. or NURBS spline based on the simplest. 2. 3. All edges. One edge. Set Step Method and Spline Type. 4. 5. Create. Choose Main Menu. In the prompt area. Creating a curve along one edge of a solid 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

also the surfaces defined from them. you can omit these steps. if the resulting curve is linear. ¨ box. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. ¨ For solids. you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. Configure. 1. See Surface types for more information on surface types. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. also the surfaces defined from them. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. The System Configuration dialog box opens. While these types will be generated by default. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. representation of the solid edge. Screen.Notes: ¨ Steps 3 and 4 affect the creation of curves on surfaces. 4. yet exact. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog 100 . However. and if the resulting curve is round. arc. 3. ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points. Mastercam creates a line. Mastercam outputs a line. Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted. 2. or NURBS spline based on the simplest. Choose the CAD Settings tab. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. If your selection in step 2 contains only solids. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. ¨ For surfaces. Mastercam outputs an arc. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. Mastercam creates a NURBS or parametric spline (depending on the spline type you selected in step 3).

If prompted that there are entities associated with your selection. Note: For information on how to use the selection methods available in step 2. You can access the Delete menu by choosing Delete from the Main Menu. 2. Merge functions. Choose Main Menu. Choose the attributes for the duplicate entities to delete. Deleting selected entities 1. 3. see Restoring deleted entities. Mastercam highlights the duplicate entities and displays the number of each type of duplicate entity in the prompt area. For more information. Note: If necessary. The Delete Duplicates dialog box appears. you can recover the deleted entities. Press [Enter] to delete the duplicate entities and return to the Delete menu. 1. 4. Choose the Start/Exit tab.Deleting and restoring entities The Delete menu gives you options for deleting entities and restoring deleted entities. Screen. The System Configuration dialog box opens. 4. or clear it to leave duplicate entities in the file. 3. Configure. Delete. Deleting duplicate entities when opening files Duplicate entities make files larger than necessary and interfere with chaining. Use the mouse to select single entities to delete or use a selection method from the Delete menu to select multiple entities. Deleting duplicate entities 1. Choose Main Menu. Check Delete duplicate entities when saving to delete entities. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose OK. Mastercam notifies you of the number of entities deleted. Choose Main Menu. 2. The Start/Exit tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you automatically delete duplicate entities when a file is opened using the File. Click on the topics below for more information. choose Yes to delete both the selected entities and the associated entities or No to cancel the delete command. Choose All to define the duplicate entities to delete based on entity type. 101 . Duplicate. Delete. see Entity selection. 5. ¨ Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. Get or File. 2. 3.

Note: You can set the number of deleted entities that can be restored on the Allocations tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. see Selecting all entities of a specified type. Restoring all entities of a specified definition 1. Click on the topics below for more information. Notes: ¨ ¨ Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted.¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. ¨ box. All. For information on using the All menu. Undelete. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Restoring deleted entities The Undelete menu gives you options for restoring deleted entities to the graphics window. Delete. Note: Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. enter the number of entities to restore. 102 . Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Number. Undelete. Delete. Delete. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Single. In the prompt area. Undelete. 2. Configure). Use the All menu to define the entities to restore based on entity type and attributes. Note: Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Choose Main Menu. 2. Restoring a single deleted entity ¨ Choose Main Menu. Restoring multiple entities 1.

2. A positive angle results in a counterclockwise rotation. Press [Esc]to exit the function. rotating. 1. scaling. Select one or more entities to rotate. To prevent mirrored text from being turned upside down or reversed. Xform. see Defining a mirror axis. You have the option to move or copy the original entities within the drawing. and a negative angle results in a clockwise rotation. On the Mirror dialog box. 3. Mastercam enables the Mirror label and note text option. Mastercam creates a temporary group from the original entities and a result from the transformed entities. offsetting. you have the option to join the copied entities to the originals. 5.Transforming entities The Xform menu gives you options for moving entities and optionally creating copies of them by mirroring. or Join. 1. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to mirror additional entities. Rotating entities Rotating is the process of moving selected entities or one or more copies of the entities around a point by a defined angle. Click on the topics below for more information. translating. Set the mirror axis to the X axis. When you perform a transform function. Mirroring entities Mirroring is the process of creating mirror images of entities by reflecting them symmetrically with respect to a defined axis. stretching. Copy. then choose Done. Mirror. You can access the Xform menu by choosing Xform from the Main Menu. Rotate. check the option. Note: To see graphics showing how different mirror axes affect the transformed entities. To mirror the text. Select one or more entities to mirror. select the type of operation to perform: Move. then choose Done. a line or 2 points in the graphics window. Take one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 6. Y axis. 2. When your selection includes drafting notes or labels. For more information. 4. and rolling them. You can mirror all geometric and drafting entity types. 103 . clear the option. If your selection contains one or more drafting notes or labels. 7. Mastercam displays the Mirror menu. Choose Main Menu. you have the option to mirror the text or to prevent the text from being reversed or turned upside down in the mirrored image. 8. With some functions. Xform. Choose OK to mirror the entities. see Working with groups. The angle is calculated relative to the horizontal axis of the current construction plane. You can rotate all geometric and drafting entity types. Choose Main Menu.

The entities will be scaled relative to this point. then choose Done. 4. Copy. then choose OK to rotate the entities. 3. 2. The Scale dialog box displays. You can use this function to scale all geometric and drafting entity types. 4. 104 . or Join. Enter a value for Rotation angle and Number of steps. then choose OK to scale the entities. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for the transform operation. Copy. On the Rotate dialog box. Notes: Enter a point to rotate the entities about. Enter a value for Scale factor and Number of steps. Xform. the increase or decrease is proportional along all axes (XYZ). The entities change size while maintaining their original shape. When a single scale factor is used. On the Scale dialog box. select the type of operation to perform: Move. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to rotate additional entities. 6. ¨ The following graphic shows geometry rotated about the yellow point. 7. Choose Main Menu. Scaling entities using a single scale factor Scaling increases or decreases the size of entities by a factor relative to a defined point. The color purple indicates the result of the transform operation after the original entities are rotated by negative 45 degrees (clockwise). 5. Press [Esc]to exit the function.3. Select Uniform in the scaling area. or Join. Select one or more entities to scale. 1. 5. Scale. 6. Enter a point in the graphics window. select the type of operation to perform: Move.

The entities not only change size but may change shape as well. Scaling entities using multiple scale factors Scaling increases or decreases the size of entities by a factor relative to a defined point. see Associating drafting entities with geometry. Scaling both the geometry and the associated dimension causes the dimension value to no longer match the geometry. Select one or more entities to scale. Mastercam will update the dimension to match the scaled geometry. Enter a point in the graphics window. ¨ The following graphics show two examples with the same geometry scaled about different points (yellow). ¨ When scaling associative dimensions. 3. A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object. 2.Note: A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. Scale. Notes: ¨ For information on scaling entities using multiple scale factors. 105 . On the Scale dialog box. The color purple indicates the result of each transform operation after the original entities are scaled by a factor of 3 (triple their original size). Repeat steps 2 through 6 to scale additional entities. For more information. The entities will be scaled relative to this point. select only the geometry to scale. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy. appearing to be stretched or squeezed from their original shape. you can manually regenerate the dimension to the correct value. then choose Done. The Scale dialog box displays. Press [Esc] to exit the function. see Scaling entities using multiple scale factors. If the auto regenerate feature is off. If the auto regenerate feature is turned on. Xform. 8. in which case. 7. You can apply a different scale factor to each of the axes (XYZ). not the dimension. A scale factor equal to 1 produces no change in size. Mastercam marks the dimension as dirty. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for each transform operation. 1. You can use this function to scale all geometric and drafting entity types except solids. Choose Main Menu. 4.

Mastercam converts the arcs to NURBS splines and displays the number of converted arcs in the prompt area. see Associating drafting entities with geometry. 106 . or see Scaling entities using a single scale factor. Press [Esc] to exit the function. not the dimension. select only the geometry to scale. Enter the Scale factor to use in each direction (XYZ).5. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to scale additional entities. Scaling both the geometry and the associated dimension causes the dimension value to no longer match the geometry. in which case. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for the transform operation. If the auto regenerate feature is off. Mastercam marks the dimension as dirty. Press [Enter] to continue. ¨ When scaling associative dimensions. A scale factor equal to 1 produces no change in size in the defined direction. Notes: ¨ To increase or decrease entities by the same amount in all directions. If your selection contained one or more arcs and you used different XYZ scale factors. The color purple indicates the result of the transform operation after the original entities are scaled by a factor of 3 (triple their original size) in the Y direction and . ¨ The following graphic shows geometry scaled about a point (yellow) using different X and Y scale factors. Mastercam will update the dimension to match the scaled geometry. 8. If the auto regenerate feature is turned on.75 (75% of their original size) in the X direction. 6. you can manually regenerate the dimension to the correct value. 7. enter the same value for the XYZ scale factors. A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object in the defined direction. For more information. Note: A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object in the defined direction. and then choose OK to scale the entities.

Xform. Press [Esc]to exit the function. Notes: 107 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to offset additional curves or press [Esc] to exit the function. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy. 5. Click on one side or the other of the selected entity to indicate the offset direction. 3. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam moves the entity in the opposite direction from the one you indicate. 2.Translating entities Translating is the process of moving selected entities or one or more copies of the entities to new positions without altering the orientation. Drag function. 1. Copy. Select a line. 4. You can move the entities within a plane or from one plane to another plane. or Join) and enter a value for Number of steps. polar coordinates. Mastercam offsets the curve. it displaces it by a defined distance and direction. You can quickly (but less precisely) translate entities using the Modify. two points. Offset. then choose OK to close the dialog box. select the type of operation to perform (Move. or spline in the graphics window. Mastercam displays the Translate Direction menu. or two points relative to two views. arc. 6. 2. Choose OK to translate the entities. On the Offset dialog box. Notes: ¨ ¨ To view a graphic of a translation between views. Enter a value for Offset distance and Number of steps. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more entities to translate. On the Translate dialog box. . or shape of the entities. You can translate all geometric and drafting entity types. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to translate additional entities. Note: If you entered a negative offset distance on the Offset dialog box. The direction is perpendicular to the curve at every point along the curve relative to the current construction plane. 3. 1. see Defining a translation direction. 4. Offsetting a single curve When Mastercam offsets a single curve. Xform. 6. 5. Define a translation direction using rectangular coordinates. size. Translate.

Note: This value is the distance that the chains will be offset in the Z direction (relative to the current construction plane). 4. see Creating parallel lines. You can enter a positive. The offset is perpendicular to the chains of curves at every position along the curves relative to the current construction plane. Xform. depending on the offset direction. Set the remaining parameters on the Offset Contour dialog box. Note: This value is the distance that the chains will be offset in the XY directions (relative to the current construction plane). Set the offset direction by choosing Right or Left in the Offset section of the dialog box. 2. Offsetting chains of curves When Mastercam offsets chains of curves. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. 6. Enter a value for Number of steps to set the number of times to perform the operation. Parallel function gives you several options for offsetting single lines. or press [Esc] to exit the function. 1. Enter a value for Distance in the Offset section of the dialog box. Enter a value for Offset depth and indicate whether the depth is Absolute or Incremental. 108 . Mastercam opens the Offset Contour dialog box. it is important to pay attention to the chaining direction. 7. Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. 3. You can enter a positive value only. For more information. Line. Note: When making your selection. The offset direction that you will set in a following step is calculated relative to the chaining direction for each selected chain. ¨ The Create. 5. then choose Done. 9. it displaces them by a defined distance and direction and optionally a depth. Indicate the type of operation to perform by choosing Move or Copy. then choose OK to offset the chains. Notes: Repeat steps 2 through 8 to offset additional chains of curves. Choose Main Menu. Ofs ctour. negative. ¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle. 8. Select one or more chains of curves.¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. or zero value.

¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle. Stretch. Lines are stretched when they cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. or two points relative to two views. Choose OK to translate/stretch the entities. 3. 6. depending on the offset direction. Stretching entities Stretching is the process of moving (translating) entities or one or more copies of the entities to new positions and optionally lengthening or shortening selected lines.¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. you can define the offset distance by entering a value for Taper angle. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to translate/stretch additional entities. The following graphic illustrates this relationship. 1. while the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original positions. Xform. The line endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated. ¨ When offsetting 2D chains using a depth other than zero. You can perform the Stretch function on all geometric and drafting entities except solids. Use the Stretch Menu to select entities to stretch. 2. 5. Define a translation direction using rectangular coordinates. This parameter is directly related to the Distance parameter in the Offset section of the dialog box. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. two points. Press [Esc]to exit the function. select the type of operation to perform (Move or Copy) and enter a value for Number of steps. Choose Main Menu. 109 . 4. polar coordinates. On the Stretch dialog box.

8. Roll.Notes: ¨ The following graphics show a rectangle that is stretched out of shape (bottom graphic) when two of its lines are intersected by a selection window (top graphic) and translated to a new position. 6. Lines. Splines. Rolling and unrolling entities The Roll function lets you wrap lines. arcs. To fit entities in a cylindrical shape when rolling them or to flatten entities when unrolling them. Indicate the direction to transform the entities about the axis by choosing CW or CCW. In Mastercam Design. Note: The rotation axis is relative to the current construction plane. 9. based on the break points. 2. Xform. or Nurbs. 7. It then generates new geometry. lines. 4. 1. Indicate the type of target geometry to create by choosing Points. Mill. Mastercam breaks the entities relative to an angle tolerance. 110 . Enter a value for Angle tolerance. and Wire. This value determines the size of the cylindrical shape about which the geometry is transformed. you can choose Z axis or X axis. In Mastercam Lathe. then choose Done. Enter a value for Rotary diameter. Indicate the type of operation to perform by choosing Move or Copy. called target geometry. Mastercam opens the Roll dialog box. Select one or more entities. Determine the type of transformation to perform: Roll or Unroll. Choose Main Menu. 5. and splines. This value determines how closely the transformed (target) geometry fits the original geometry. Note: Your selection can include points. 3. You can choose to create points at the break points or lines or splines between the break points. arcs. A smaller value results in a more precise fit. and splines about an axis as though around a cylinder or unwrap rolled entities to make them lie flat. you can choose X axis or Y axis. Indicate the axis to transform the entities about.

the dialog box reopens. Copy. and splines to the current construction plane. and line width) Note: You can choose either or both check boxes. Choose OK. Choose OK to close the dialog box and transform the geometry. or Join. choose Associate pts. ¨ To position the target geometry relative to a translation vector. 3. Define the translation vector by entering a point to translate from and a point to translate to. 7. The system converts arcs to NURBS splines if they are not parallel to the construction plane. Press [Esc] to exit the function. line style. 5. 1. then choose Select. Choose Main Menu. 2D plane. level. Repeat steps 2 thru 5 to project additional entities. Xform. Select the entities to project using the General Selection menu and choose Done. 111 . then enter a value in the text box. Select an operation: Move. Squashing entities The Squash dialog box allows you to project selected points.10. choose Angle. lines. This means you can select entities in various positions in 3D space and squash them into a flat. 4. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 11. 6. Squash. arcs. Set the position of the target geometry by taking one of the following actions: ¨ To position the target geometry relative to an angle value. After you enter two points. Enter the Depth or choose: ¨ The Construction depth check box (so that the projected entities remain at the current construction depth) ¨ The Construction attributes check box (so that attributes of the projected entities use the current construction color. 2. The Squash dialog box displays.

L.Determines whether Mastercam trims the selected curves to the fillet. By default. Radius . Modify. Choose A to create fillets along all corners. P. This option is a Yes/No toggle. P to create fillets at positive. Angle . and N. although you have the option to turn off trimming. L (Larger) to create fillets that are larger than 180 degrees. or F (Full) to create fillets that are full circles (360 degrees). Fillet. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. You can access the Modify menu by choosing Modify from the Main Menu. Choose Y to activate trimming or N to deactivate trimming. Mastercam trims the curves to the fillet. you create an arc of a defined radius tangent to the curves. or N to create fillets at negative. See Filleting corners along chains of curves for more information. This option toggles between S. Click on the topics below for more information. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. This option toggles between A.Determines the size of the resulting fillets. 112 . Fillet or by choosing Main Menu. or counterclockwise (CCW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). Create. Chain .Displays the Chaining Methods menu where you can select chains of curves to create fillets at sharp corners along the chains.Modifying entities The Modify menu gives you options for modifying entities. When you fillet curves. Trim . Choose S (Smaller) to create fillets that are smaller than 180 degrees. Determines which corners are used to create fillets along the chains of curves.Determines the sweep of the fillet arc. and F. Filleting curves The Fillet menu gives you options for filleting curves. or clockwise (CW) corners (relative to the chaining direction).

arc. or if the Cplane is set to 3D. ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). or spline to trim to. Mastercam trims curves by cutting them back or extending them at their intersections. Modify. arc. Finally. The result varies depending on where you select the line. be sure to select each curve on the part of the curve that you want to keep. Note: The following graphics show the selection of a vertical line trimmed to the horizontal line. 5. You can access the Trim menu by choosing Main Menu. Modify. Select a line. 2. These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance. Select a line. in cases where the intersection between two curves offers variable solutions. Mastercam does not extend splines beyond their original endpoints. the curves must have an actual intersection. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. 113 . 4. Trim. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional curves. Trimming curves The Trim menu gives you options for trimming curves to one another. or spline to trim. 1. however.Notes: ¨ This option applies only when Filleting corners along chains of curves. Trimming one curve This function trims one curve to its intersection with a second curve without modifying the second entity. The curves must lie in the same Cplane. 1 entity. Trim. 3.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which acts as a trimming curve. The third curve is then trimmed to the first two curves. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional entities. The result varies depending on where you select the lines. Modify. Note: The following graphics show the selection of a two lines trimmed to their intersection. Trimming three curves This function trims three curves. 114 . Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. 5. 2. arc. as shown in the following graphic. 2. Select two lines. 3. Note: This function is useful for trimming two lines to a circle that is tangent to both lines. arc. Select a line. 1. Trim. arc. The first two curves that you select are trimmed to the third selected curve. 3 entities. The arc is selected last. or spline as the first entity to trim. 1. Trim. 4. or spline as the second entity to trim. Modify. and the results vary depending on whether you select to keep the top or the bottom of the arc. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a line.Trimming two curves This function trims two curves to their intersection. 2 entities. or spline to trim to. or splines to trim. Select a line. arcs. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional entities. 3.

Many. then choose Done. 2.Trimming a curve to a point This function trims a curve to a point or any defined position in the graphics window. arcs. Select one or more lines. Choose Main Menu. 4. and splines to trim. Trim. arc. Modify. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter a point to trim to. Choose Main Menu. 5. Trim. Trimming multiple curves to a single trimming curve This function trims multiple curves to a selected trimming curve without modifying the trimming curve. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional curves. or spline. Select a line. If the point that you enter does not lie on the selected entity. extended) to a point that does not lie on the curve. 115 . Modify. Note: The following graphic shows an arc that is trimmed (in this case. 1. To point. 1. Mastercam calculates the closest position on the entity and trims the entity to that point.

Modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: The following graphic shows two examples. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Modify. Repeat step 2 to close additional arcs. or splines to use as dividing curves. 1. Select a line or arc to divide. 6. Choose Main Menu. 5.3. which varies depending on which side of the curves you select to keep. Select an entity on the side of the trimming curve that you want to keep. Select a line. 2. 3. Trim. Dividing a line or arc between two trimming curves This function trims a line or arc into two disjointed segments by removing the segment that lies between two dividing curves. Trim. or spline to trim to. 4. Closing an arc to form a full circle 1. Select an arc that is less than 360 degrees. 5. arc. 4. The dashed green line shows the portion of each arc that is trimmed. Select any two lines. 2. Close arc. Note: The following graphic shows a line that is trimmed between two arcs. each containing four arcs that are trimmed to a line (red). 4. 116 . arcs. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to divide additional curves Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. Divide. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to trim additional curves.

2. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to break additional entities. 2. or spline near the endpoint that you want to use to calculate length. crosshatches. Break. 3. Breaking a curve into two segments at a defined point 1. The system breaks the entity into two segments. Break. Break. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to break additional entities. Mastercam breaks the curve at the defined length from the selected endpoint. 4. Select a line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. Modify. 5. Select a line in the graphics window. or spline. Breaking a line into multiple segments 1. 4. Choose Main Menu. 3. Modify. Take one of the following actions: 117 . Note: If you enter a break point that does not lie on the selected curve. You can access the Break menu by choosing Main Menu. Modify. 5. At length. Choose Main Menu. 3. In the prompt area. Enter a point where you want to break the selected entity. 2 pieces.Breaking entities The Break menu gives you option for breaking curves into multiple segments and for breaking drafting entities. the system finds the location on the curve that is closest to the point and breaks the curve at that point. Select a line. Mny pieces. Break. and copious data into geometric entities. Choose Main Menu. Modify. enter a value for length. Press [Esc] to exit the function. arc. Breaking a curve into two segments at a defined length 1. arc.

enter the number of segments. 2. choose Num seg. In the prompt area. 3. Take one of the following actions: ¨ To break the arc into a defined number of segments. choose Seg length. In the prompt area. In the prompt area. Choose Do it to break the line. Mny pieces. Select a spline in the graphics window. ¨ To break the line into segments of a defined length.¨ To break the line into a defined number of segments. Choose Main Menu. In the prompt area. enter the segment length. 7. Select an arc in the graphics window. 2. ¨ To break the arc into segments of a defined length. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Breaking a spline into multiple line segments 1. choose Seg length. 5. choose by Length. enter the number of segments. enter the segment length. 6. Breaking an arc into multiple arc or line segments 1. choose by Length. enter the number of segments. ¨ To break the spline into segments of a defined length. Set Arcs to Y to break the arc into arc segments or N to break it into line segments. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to break additional arcs. 4. Choose Do it to break the arc. Take one of the following actions: ¨ To break the spline into a defined number of segments. In the prompt area. Mny pieces. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to break additional lines. choose Num seg. 4. Choose Main Menu. 118 . enter the segment length. 5. Num seg. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Modify. Break. In the prompt area. Break. Modify. Seg length. 6.

enter the chord height tolerance (distance) that determines how closely the resulting arc and line segments fit the original splines. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to break additional splines. A larger value results in a looser fit. Choose Do it to break the spline. 4. Break. arcs. Modify. Choose Do it to break the selected splines. labels. Select one or more lines. Choose Error. Error. In the prompt area. Note: A smaller value results in a closer fit. and NURBS splines. Note: Press [F3] to remove the display points. or 2D splines that lie in undefined views. Choose Main Menu. and leader lines into lines. Select one or more 2D splines. 2D splines that do not lie in the current Cplane. witness lines. Note: A smaller value results in a closer fit. Breaking drafting entities into geometric entities This function breaks drafting dimensions. At inters. then choose Done. 2. then choose Done. 6. set Dispose to D. Spl to arcs. or splines. Modify. 4. notes. 119 . In the prompt area. ¨ ¨ ¨ 5. 5. 1. Note: Mastercam does not break 3D splines. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. set Dispose to B. To delete the splines. Take one of the following actions: To keep the splines. Mastercam displays temporary points at each break point. 2. enter the chord height tolerance (distance) that determines how closely the resulting segments fit the original spline. Modify. Break. A larger value results in a looser fit. Break. set Dispose to K. choose by Error. Breaking curves at their intersections with other curves 1. 3. Breaking 2D splines into arc and line segments 1. arcs. To blank the splines.¨ To break the spline based on a chord height tolerance. Draft/line. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Modify. Select one or more drafting entities. Using the chaining option to break the geometry is equivalent to using this procedure. 1. or work origin position. Break. Modify. STCW position. The newly created lines have the same line style as the crosshatch pattern.2. Note: Copious data is an entity type that originates in an IGES file and represents a collection of geometric forms (points and lines). While the STCW position may appear to be perpendicular to the contour. Note: Mastercam Wire allows you to set a chaining option "Break closest entity to thread point. The options in this menu let you choose to break a line or an arc at a point perpendicular to the current start. cut." When this option is activated and you chain geometry for a wirepath. You have the option to convert copious data to points and lines when you read an IGES file into Mastercam. perpendicular to the thread point. 4. 120 . Select a copious data entity to break. Press [Esc] to exit the function. STCW position opens the STCW Position Settings menu. Modify. Mastercam Wire requires a start of contour to begin cutting the part. Cdata/line. thread. Repeat step 2 to break additional entities. Hatch/line. 4. 2. Choose Main Menu. Break. Choose Main Menu. Breaking hatch entities into lines This function breaks lines in a crosshatch pattern into line entities. 2. Modify. Choose Main Menu. Break. By breaking the geometry. 1. you create an entity endpoint that can be used for the start of contour when chaining. Mastercam breaks the entities and exits the function. Breaking copious data into points and lines This function breaks a copious data entity into points or lines. Mastercam Wire automatically breaks the entity that is closest to the thread point. Repeat step 2 to break additional crosshatches. 3. 3. it is a general rule of thumb to lead in to the part geometry perpendicular to the contour. depending on the form of the copious data entity. Breaking the geometry perpendicular to the STCW position In Wire EDM. Choosing Main Menu. Break. Select a crosshatch to break. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 1.

Choose another entity or move the S. arc. Breakcir C-Hook When you run the Breakcir C-Hook. Choose Esc when done. Break. arcs that have the same center and radius. Select the entity to break. or W position. and also allow you to easily specify lead in/out moves for the tab cuts. The parameters allow for easy modification using associativity. 3. C. 4. T. This function helps prepare geometry for the post processor by eliminating full circles. C.360 degrees and that match the main system color into two 180-degree arcs. 5. 1. 121 . Make tab Choosing Main Menu.doc Joining segments of broken curves This function joins collinear lines. Modify. T. this method breaks the selected entity at the point that you choose and marks the entity endpoint with a glue stop or program stop. or splines that were originally created as the same entity. we recommend creating tabs using the tab parameters in the Cuts tab of the contour or 4-axis wirepath dialog box. To make a tab. Mastercam Wire inserts the stop code when it generates the wirepath. Note: If Mastercam Wire displays the message "cannot break line or arc past its endpoints. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to join additional curves. Note: While the Modify. You can view the stop code when backplotting the wirepath. Creating tabs with Modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose the from the menu the S. or W position perpendicular to which you want to break the geometry. Make tab function provides continuity for users of previous versions of Mastercam Wire. 4." the entity you are trying to break cannot be broken perpendicular to the S. Make tab is an alternate method of creating a tab on a wirepath. Modify. 2. 3. Select another entity of the same type. Choose Main Menu.2. or W position without extending the entity.txt Breakcir. Select a line. Break. C.dll Breakcir. Join. The files for this C-Hook include: ¨ ¨ ¨ Breakcir. Break. T. the system automatically breaks all arcs that have a sweep of +/. or spline.

2. Modifying surface normals The Modify Normal menu gives you options for checking and changing surface normal directions. see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction. Normal. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. the system creates the new entity using the attributes of the first entity that you select. Choose Main Menu. Set norms Press [Esc] to exit the function. Reversing the surface normal direction 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Click on the topics below for more information. You can perform the same function by choosing Main Menu. Normal. ¨ To check the surface normal direction before reversing it. Analyze. see About surface normals. In the prompt area. or positive. Notes: ¨ For more information about surface normals. Reverse. normal direction points downward relative to the current Cplane. then choose Done. Modify. see About surface normals. Modify. 2. Select a surface in the graphics window. 3. Choose Main Menu. Surfaces. 1.Notes: ¨ This function is useful for joining curves that were broken or trimmed. Normal. Select one or more surfaces. Mastercam reports the number of reversals. Mastercam reverses the surface normal direction. Notes: ¨ ¨ For more information about surface normals. 3. Repeat step 2 to reverse the normal direction for additional surfaces. 122 . Set. ¨ If the two entities that you select to join have different attributes. Modify. Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane This function checks selected surfaces and reverses the normal direction on any surface whose outward. 4. The plus sign indicates the currently selected menu option.

2. which changes the shape of the NURBS entity that is defined by the control point. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. Note: The size of the arrowhead changes to reflect the arrow’s position relative to your perspective in the current graphics view. 3. Cpts NURBS). Enter an ending point to set its position.Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction 1. Cpts NURBS. Set the outward. Modify. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. 4. 5. Select a surface. normal direction based on the cursor position. The arrow points in the outward. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point relative to the position of the starting and ending points that you enter. Choose Dynamic. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. Dragging a control point to a new position 1. Move the arrow along the surface to check the normal direction. Changing the shape of a NURBS spline or surface Mastercam displays the Modify NURBS Cpts menu when you are in the process of modifying a control point on a NURBS spline or NURBS surface (Main Menu. 3. 123 . Choose Main Menu. 6. Note: To reverse the surface normal direction quickly without checking it first. Modify. Enter a starting point to begin dragging the control point. Mastercam displays a direction menu. 4. or positive. click to set its position. 2. ¨ ¨ When you can see the arrow clearly. 5. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the normal (the outward direction). then choose OK. or positive. A larger arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points toward you. This menu gives you options for modifying the position or weight of the selected control point. see Reversing the surface normal direction. Modify. surface normal direction by taking one of the following actions: Choose OK to accept the direction of the normal (the outward direction). Choose Main Menu. Dynamic. Select a control point. a smaller arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points away from you. Normal.

124 . you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. 7. Enter a point for the position of the control point. If you select one in step 3. Cpts NURBS. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. 5. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. 8. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. 2. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to modify additional control points. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. 4. 3. If you select one in step 3. Select a control point. 1. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. curve-generated revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point. Choose Point entry. Modifying the weight of a control point You can modify the weight of a control point for rational NURBS entities only. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Moving a control point to a defined position 1. NURBS revolved surfaces. Modify. Cpts NURBS. You cannot modify these points. arcs that were converted to NURBS format.7. Modify. Examples of rational NURBS entities include: NURBS ellipses. You cannot modify these points. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. 6. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. and parametric revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format.

Note: The weight of a control point affects its influence on the NURBS entity that it defines. 3. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. Select a rational NURBS spline or surface. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Choose Main Menu. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Modify. If you select one in step 3. Select one or more curves or surfaces. Choose Weight. Repeat step 2 to convert additional entities. 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Extending entities The Extend menu gives you options for extending lines. A higher value pulls the NURBS entity toward the control point. Choose Main Menu. enter a value for the weight of the control point. You cannot modify these points. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. In the prompt area. X to NURBS. Length. then choose Done. 4. splines. Extending or trimming a curve by a defined length 1. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. Select a control point. 5. and surfaces. Mastercam converts the selected entities to NURBS format. arcs. You can access the Extend menu by choosing Main Menu. Converting curves and surfaces to NURBS format This function converts lines. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. 6. arcs.2. 2. Extend. Extend. 125 . 3. Modify. Modify. and parametric splines to NURBS splines and curve-generated and parametric surfaces to NURBS surfaces. 7. and a lower value pushes the NURBS entity away from the control point. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points.

the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. 10. then click. For example. arc. 4. 5. Extend. Set To plane to N. enter a value for length. and you can choose to keep. 8. Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. When Mastercam extends a surface. 1. Repeat step 3 to extend or trim additional curves by the defined length. However. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Trim/extend. 3. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. ¨ When possible. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Surface. Choose Do it to extend the surface. NURBS. Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. 2. 9. as needed. 6. Create. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. or spline close to the endpoint that you want to extend or trim. enter the length to extend the surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. 5. 7. or curve-generated) as the original surface. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface. Select a line. Choose Main Menu. Modify. 4. Extend. blank. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Note: A positive value extends the entity.2. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length. Surface. Choose Length. or delete the original surface. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve- 126 . and a negative value trims the entity. In the prompt area. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

Surface. and you can choose to keep. 2.generated. Set To plane to Y. 3. 5. However. Dragging entities to new positions in the graphics window The Drag dialog box gives you options for quickly and dynamically moving entities in the graphics window by translating. Trim/extend. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. You can access the Drag dialog box by choosing Main Menu. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. 7. 1. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. as needed. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choose Main Menu. Modify. Drag. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. For example. Extend. Create. Set Linear to Y. Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. In such cases. Dragging entities using translation This function quickly and dynamically moves selected entities or a copy of the entities to a new position in the graphics window. 8. or delete the original surface. blank. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Do it to extend the surface. then click. rotating. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to. Click on the topics below for more information. 6. Select a surface in the graphics window. Modify. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Drag. ¨ When possible. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Choose Plane. When Mastercam extends a surface. Extend. 9. 4. Surface. NURBS. Modify. or curve-generated) as the original surface. 1. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. and stretching them. 127 . it creates the extended surface as a new surface. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. In such cases.

Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. 6. Drag the entities in the graphics window. Choose Translate. Choose Done. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities. use the + and – keys to rotate while dragging the entity with the mouse. 11. When in translate mode. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis. 8. ¨ ¨ [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode. 10. ¨ [-] – CW . [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode. [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. ¨ [S] – Snap – Opens the Point Entry menu which allows you to snap the selected entity to a defined position. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Copy – Select this option to make a copy of the selected entities. Choose OK. then click to set their position. 7. 128 . ¨ XY – Enter X or Y to select an axis for the translation. The Drag dialog box displays. use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. Enter Step Parameters values: ¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated. using the + and – keys. If desired. Select the geometry to transform. Select the starting point. ¨ ¨ 5. ¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. 4.2. ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. 3. 9.

The Drag dialog box displays. Choose Done. 8. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities. Modify. Drag the entities in the graphics window.Enter X or Y to select an axis to translate the entity along. You can use the + and – keys to translate the entity while rotating. 9. ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. 129 . 4. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis while rotating the entity with the mouse. Select the geometry to rotate. use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. Copy – Select this option to move a copy of the selected entities. [S] – Snap – Snaps the selected entity to a defined position. Enter Step Parameters values: Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated as you drag the entity with the mouse. [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode. using the + and – keys. Choose Rotate Choose OK. 2. 6. 3. 7.Dragging entities using rotation This function quickly and dynamically moves selected entities or a copy of the entities by rotating the entities about a point. [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. 1. then click to set their position. Select the starting point. [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode. ¨ ¨ 5. 10. ¨ XY . If desired. Drag. ¨ Choose Main Menu.

Dragging entities using stretch methods This function quickly and dynamically moves (translates) selected entities or copies of the entities to new positions and optionally stretches (lengthens or shortens) selected lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Done. Select the starting point. 1. Repeat steps 6 through 10 to transform the same set of selected entities or steps 2 through 10 to transform a new set of entities. Modify. Choose Main Menu. 6. You can use the + and – keys to translate the entity while stretching. Drag the entities in the graphics window. 130 . 9. Choose Rotate or Translate. and draw a window around the lines you wish to stretch. The line endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated. Copy – Select this option to move a copy of the selected entities. and select Stretch. (Use the + or – keys to rotate as the entity is being stretched with the mouse.¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. ¨ ¨ 5. while the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original positions. ¨ [-] – CW . Choose Window.) ¨ XY – Enter X or Y to select an axis to translate the entity along. 8. 4. 7. Lines are stretched when they cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. Choose OK. 2. The Drag dialog box displays. Enter Step Parameters values: ¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis while stretching the entity with the mouse.Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. Drag. 3. 12. then click to set their position. 11. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities.

[T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode. 12. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Stretch Creating arcs from circular splines This function creates arcs based on the geometry of circular-shaped splines. Rotate Xform. [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. using the + and – keys. Set parameters on the Modify Circular Splines to Arcs menu. 11. 2. 3. 5. 1. Press [Enter] to erase the message. If desired. the following Xform functions offer more advanced and precise transformation methods: Xform. Cnv to arcs. ¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. Note: This function is particularly useful if geometry that is supposed to denote circles or arcs is read into Mastercam as splines during a file conversion. then choose Do it to create the arcs. Mastercam displays the number of arcs that were successfully created. then choose Done.10. Modify. 4. [S] – Snap – Snaps the selected entity to a defined position.Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. Translate Xform. Choose Main Menu. [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode. ¨ [-] – CW . Press [Esc] to exit the function Note: While the Drag function serves as a quick way to move entities in the graphics window. ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. you can more easily and accurately determine do so if they are arcs instead of splines. Select one or more circular-shaped splines. If you later want to reference the centers of the circular geometry or dimension the circles. 131 . use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. Repeat steps 2 through 10 to stretch additional entities.

2. Enter a starting point to begin dragging the control point. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. In the prompt area.Extending or trimming a curve by a defined length 1. Extend. 3. Choose Main Menu. Cpts NURBS. or spline close to the endpoint that you want to extend or trim. Enter an ending point to set its position. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. 4. 5. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. This menu gives you options for modifying the position or weight of the selected control point. Choose Main Menu. Choose Dynamic. Dragging a control point to a new position 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Length. arc. 132 . 2. 8. Repeat step 3 to extend or trim additional curves by the defined length. 4. 5. 6. Select a line. Modify. Cpts NURBS). Modify. Note: A positive value extends the entity. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which changes the shape of the NURBS entity that is defined by the control point. 7. Select a control point. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point relative to the position of the starting and ending points that you enter. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. and a negative value trims the entity. Modify. enter a value for length. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. Changing the shape of a NURBS spline or surface Mastercam displays the Modify NURBS Cpts menu when you are in the process of modifying a control point on a NURBS spline or NURBS surface (Main Menu. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to modify additional control points.

¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. You cannot modify these points. Choose Point entry. 5. 5. Enter a point for the position of the control point. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. Modify. 4. In the prompt area. 2. Cpts NURBS. Select a control point. Choose Main Menu. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. 4. Choose Weight. Press [Esc] to exit the function. curve-generated revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. 3. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. 133 . Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. If you select one in step 3. Select a control point. 2. 6. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point. Moving a control point to a defined position 1. You cannot modify these points. NURBS revolved surfaces. Cpts NURBS. Examples of rational NURBS entities include: NURBS ellipses. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. and parametric revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. enter a value for the weight of the control point. 3. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. Modifying the weight of a control point You can modify the weight of a control point for rational NURBS entities only. Choose Main Menu. If you select one in step 3. Modify. Select a rational NURBS spline or surface. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. 1. arcs that were converted to NURBS format. 7.

¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. or away from the solid volume. outward) direction. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Each surface has two normal vectors. the default positive normal direction is based on the relative directions of the curves defining the surface. One is referred to as the positive (front. the other is referred to as the negative (back. The positive normal direction always points outward. Press [Esc] to exit the function. the arrow shows the normal vector directions of a surface at the position of the base of the arrow. Notes: ¨ Like surfaces. About surface normals A surface normal is a vector (direction) that is perpendicular to the tangent plane of a surface at the point of tangency. 7. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. solid faces have two normal vectors. inward) direction. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. In the following graphics. You cannot modify these points. A higher value pulls the NURBS entity toward the control point. When a surface is created. and a lower value pushes the NURBS entity away from the control point. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. 6. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. 134 . which point in opposite directions.Note: The weight of a control point affects its influence on the NURBS entity that it defines. If you select one in step 3.

Curve. see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction and Analyzing a curve. 135 . Fillet.¨ Curves have one normal vector that is perpendicular to the tangent line of the curve at the point of tangency. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. If you enter a positive offset distance. ¨ You can verify the positive normal direction at any position on a surface. Surface. If you enter a negative offset distance. For more information. ¨ When creating curves at the intersection of a slice plane with surfaces and solids (Create. regardless of the normal directions. For information about the Show Back function. ¨ When creating fillet surfaces between two sets of surfaces (Create. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. ¨ When creating curves at the intersections of two sets of surfaces and solids (Create. If you enter a positive offset distance. you have the option to create the curves at an offset position of the surfaces and solids. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. you have the option to project the curves onto offset positions of the surfaces and solids. see Checking surface normals. Identifying the positive surface normal direction There are several ways to identify the positive normal direction of a surface: ¨ The Show Back function. If you enter a positive offset distance. in which case Mastercam creates fillet on all sides of the surfaces. Offset). If you enter a negative offset distance. Fillet. see Showing and setting the back color for surface displays. the positive normal direction always points away from the solid volume. If you enter a negative offset distance. and the negative normal direction points into the solid volume. Note: For solids. How the surface normal direction affects your work in Mastercam ¨ When offsetting surfaces (Create. when active. applies a defined color to the back (negative) side of the wireframe display of a surface. Curve. Mastercam offsets surfaces in the positive normal direction when the offset distance is a positive value and in the negative normal direction when the offset distance is a negative value. Plane/surf). Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. Surface. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. you have the option to create the curves at an offset position of the surfaces and solids. which distinguishes it from the front (positive) side. Surface. Surf/Surf) or between surfaces and a plane (Create. Intersect). Slice). ¨ A check normals option is built into functions where the normal direction affects the resulting geometry so that you can check the normal direction without leaving the function. Curve. Project). surface. or solid face at any position. ¨ When projecting curves onto surfaces and solids (Create. Mastercam creates fillet surfaces on the sides of the surfaces that point in the positive normal direction unless you select the "Fillet Both Sides" option. For more information. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction.

Notes: ¨ ¨ For more information about surface normals. or positive. Modify. Modify.Example In the following example. Select one or more surfaces. ¨ The surfaces in the graphic on the right are offset by a negative value. The surfaces in this set are not moved in either direction. The positive normal direction for all of the surfaces points inward toward the center of the cube. each surface in this set is moved in the outward direction. ¨ The surfaces in the graphic on the left are offset by a positive value. Analyze. In the prompt area. The plus sign indicates the currently selected menu option. and the negative normal direction points outward from the center of the cube. each surface in this set is moved in the inward direction. Set. 3. each forming a cube. 1. Normal. You can perform the same function by choosing Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. see About surface normals. then choose Done. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Normal. Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane This function checks selected surfaces and reverses the normal direction on any surface whose outward. three sets of surfaces. ¨ The surfaces in the center graphic are offset by a zero distance. Since the positive normal direction points inward. Mastercam reports the number of reversals. Modifying surface normals The Modify Normal menu gives you options for checking and changing surface normal directions. Since the negative normal direction is outward. 2. 136 . normal direction points downward relative to the current Cplane. Surfaces. Set norms. are offset by different values. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu.

or positive. 2. Select a surface. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the normal (the outward direction). surface normal direction by taking one of the following actions: Choose OK to accept the direction of the normal (the outward direction). ¨ To check the surface normal direction before reversing it. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. the system calculates data using coordinates relative to the current Cplane. Normal. Analyzing entities The Analyze menu gives you options for viewing data about entities and. Normal. in some cases. Notes: ¨ For more information about surface normals. Choose Main Menu. Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction 1. Note: The size of the arrowhead changes to reflect the arrow’s position relative to your perspective in the current graphics view. Press [Esc] to exit the function. ¨ ¨ When you can see the arrow clearly.0). 4. When the construction plane is set to 3D. see Reversing the surface normal direction.Reversing the surface normal direction 1. In any other construction mode. Note: To reverse the surface normal direction quickly without checking it first. 137 . see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction. a smaller arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points away from you. The arrow points in the outward. 2. Mastercam displays a direction menu. A larger arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points toward you. Set the outward. or world. Mastercam reverses the surface normal direction. Modify. 5. You can access the Analyze menu by choosing Analyze from the Main Menu. or positive. Choose Main Menu. Repeat step 2 to reverse the normal direction for additional surfaces. Dynamic. 3. click to set its position. coordinates relative to the system origin (0. normal direction based on the cursor position. Reverse. 4. Mastercam calculates data using absolute. 3. see About surface normals. editing the data. then choose OK. Move the arrow along the surface to check the normal direction. Modify.0.

type a comment for the report (optional). Point. Analyzing chains for offset data 1. type a comment for the report (optional). then choose OK. Set Contour type to 2D. 4. Set Contour type to 2D to analyze the boundary for 2D data or 3D to analyze the boundary for 3D Note: Choose 3D if your selection in step 2 contained spline entities. Set Offset direction to Left or Right. 4. 3. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the point. 6. Set Offset direction to Off and ignore all other options on the Analyze Contour Parameters dialog Note: This step does not apply to Mastercam Design users since the only parameters available are those pertaining to Contour type (set in step 3). Set Offset Distance to a value other than zero.Analyzing the coordinates of a point 1. 2. Choose Main Menu. View the data. In the prompt area. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. Enter a point in the graphics window. 138 . Select one or more chains. Contour. 7. Analyze. Analyze. 3. In the prompt area. 5. 4. Contour. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Analyze. 7. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional points. Note: Press [Alt+P] to print the data. 2. then press [Enter]. data. Select one or more chains. 6. then choose Done. box. then choose Done. 5. In the prompt area. then close the window. then press [Enter]. Choose Main Menu. 3. Analyzing chains for coordinate data 1. Set the remaining parameters on the Analyze Contour Parameters dialog box.

Use the Only menu to define your selection. choose Only from the Analyze Entity menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which is useful when you make your selection in complex geometry. Analyzing entities of a defined type You can limit the entities that are selectable by defining allowable entity types and/or attributes using the Only menu. ¨ To analyze spline entities for offset data. In the prompt area. 2. press [Alt+P] before closing the file in step 8. 5. Between pts. Analyze. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to analyze additional entities of the defined type. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. then close the window. 3. see Breaking a spline into multiple line segments and Breaking 2D splines into arc and line segments. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt area or in a dialog box. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. Enter two points in the graphics window. For more information. 2. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. depending on the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu. View the data. Choose Main Menu. Notes: ¨ ¨ To print the data. 4. 139 . Choose Main Menu. Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Analyze. Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. 4. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. Enter two points in the graphics window. Analyze. This function is not available in Mastercam Design. 3. Doing so reduces your chance of selecting the wrong entity to analyze. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. Note: To redefine the type of entity to analyze. 2. you must first break them into line or arc segments. 4. 3. In the prompt area. Select an entity. Only. 1. Between pts.8.

Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Between pts.

2. Enter two points in the graphics window. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. 3. 4. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing a curve, surface, or solid face at any position Mastercam displays different data depending on the type of entity you select. ¨ For lines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates.

¨ For arcs and splines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates and the radius of curvature. ¨ For surfaces and solid faces, Mastercam displays the point coordinates, the normal coordinates, and the minimum radius of curvature. 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Dynamic.

2. Select a line, arc, spline, surface, or solid face. In the graphics window, Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected entity. 3. Use the mouse to move the base of the arrow to positions that you want to analyze on the entity. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays data relative to the arrow position. 4. 5. 6. Press [Esc] to stop analyzing the selected entity. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to analyze additional entities. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing the area/volume of entities The Analyze Area/Volume menu gives you options for analyzing the 2D area of curves, the area defined by surfaces and solid faces, and the volume defined by solid entities. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume. Analyzing 2D curve area 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, 2D area. Select one or more closed, flat chains, then choose Done.

140

Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed. 3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. 4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing surface and solid area 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Surface area. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

Note: For a solid, Mastercam analyzes the area of all faces associated with the solid. 3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. 4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing solid volumes 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Solid props. If prompted, select a solid.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically. 3. View the data for Volume, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing an entity by number Mastercam assigns a unique number to each entity in the file, which provides a useful method for referencing entities. 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Number.

2. In the prompt area, enter the number of the entity to analyze. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt area or in a dialog box, depending on the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu. 3. To analyze additional entities by number, choose Number on the Analyze Entity menu and enter the entity number in the prompt area.

141

4.

Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing problems in chains In addition to analyzing chains for overlapping entities, direction reversals, and short entities, you can create geometry to mark problem areas, which helps you identify these areas in order to fix them. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Chain. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: To avoid missing overlapping or short entities, we recommend that you use the Window chaining method. 3. Set display options for the types of problems you want to locate in the chains, then choose OK.

4. In the prompt area, Mastercam reports the number of each type of problem it finds and highlights the problem areas in the graphics window. Press [Enter] to exit the function after reviewing the data. Analyzing surfaces The Analyze Surfaces menu gives you options for analyzing surfaces for information such as surface curvature, bad surfaces, base surfaces, downward normal directions, backups, and self-intersections. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces. Analyzing surface curvature 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Curvature. Choose Rad limits. In the prompt area, type a value for the minimum detectable radius, then press [Enter]. Type a value for the maximum detectable radius, then press [Enter]. Choose Surfaces. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

Note: To analyze all visible surfaces, skip this step. 7. Set additional parameters on the Surface Curvature Analysis menu, as needed, then choose Do it to view the curvature display.

Testing surface normals The Test Normals function analyzes the normal vector of selected surfaces and reports the number of bad surfaces whose normal vector reverses direction abruptly in one or more locations. These surfaces are inherently unstable and may present problems during machining or may be unmachinable.

142

In addition to reporting the number of bad surfaces, this function gives you the option to change the color of the surfaces, which is helpful for identifying them in the graphics window in order to fix or recreate them. When changing the color of these surfaces, Mastercam uses the main system color, as indicated on the Secondary menu. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Test norms. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

3. Mastercam displays a window containing the number of bad surfaces in the selection. Choose OK to continue. 4. If prompted, choose Yes to change the color of bad surfaces to the current system color, which makes them easier to identify in the graphics window, or No to maintain the current color of the surfaces. Notes: ¨ Once you’ve identified bad surfaces, you can use the Analyze, Dynamic function to further analyze the direction changes. ¨ To correct a bad surface, the portion of the surface containing the direction reversal must be trimmed from the surface, if possible. Otherwise, the surface must be recreated.

Checking the display for visible base surfaces This function lets you quickly check for and optionally blank visible base surfaces in the graphics window. Note: A base surface is the untrimmed parent surface of a trimmed surface. When Mastercam trims a surface, it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface and, in most cases, blanks the base surface, which allows you to work with the new surface and does not crowd the graphics window with the associated base surface. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Base surfs. Choose All, Surfaces, Done.

3. Mastercam displays a window containing the number of visible base surfaces in the current file. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 4. If prompted, choose Yes to blank the base surfaces or No to maintain the base surfaces as visible surfaces.

Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane The Check Model function analyzes surfaces for the following conditions, which pose problems in surface machining and surface shading: self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges. The Check Model function is capable of fixing backups. However, it is not capable of fixing self-intersections or internal sharp ridges. We recommend that you try to fix these conditions in the sending system before importing the file 143

into Mastercam. You can also try to fix the problems in Mastercam by trimming the self-intersection from the trimmed surface and by splitting surfaces along the ridges. See the related topics below for more information. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check model. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done. In the prompt area, enter a self-intersection tolerance.

4. Mastercam analyzes the selected surfaces and displays a message stating the number of trimmed surfaces and the number of surfaces containing each type of problem. Choose OK to continue. 5. When problem surfaces are detected, you have the option to have Mastercam mark them in the graphics window. Doing so is helpful for identifying them in order to fix or recreate them. Follow the system prompts. Note: You have the following options for marking problem surfaces: ¨ For backups, you can change the surface color to a color that you select.

¨ For self-intersections, you can change the surface color to a color that you select. You can also create a point entity at the location where the surface crosses over itself. Mastercam creates this point using the main system color, as defined on the Secondary menu. ¨ For internal sharp ridges, you can create curves (lines, arcs, splines) along the sharp ridges. You have the option to create the curves using a color that you select or the main system color, as defined on the Secondary menu.

Checking surface models for self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges The Check Model function analyzes surfaces for the following conditions, which pose problems in surface machining and surface shading: self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges. The Check Model function is capable of fixing backups. However, it is not capable of fixing self-intersections or internal sharp ridges. We recommend that you try to fix these conditions in the sending system before importing the file into Mastercam. You can also try to fix the problems in Mastercam by trimming the self-intersection from the trimmed surface and by splitting surfaces along the ridges. See the related topics below for more information. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check model. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done. In the prompt area, enter a self-intersection tolerance.

4. Mastercam analyzes the selected surfaces and displays a message stating the number of trimmed surfaces and the number of surfaces containing each type of problem. Choose OK to continue.

144

you have the option to have Mastercam mark them in the graphics window. you can create curves (lines. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. Choose Check Solid. You can also create a point entity at the location where the surface crosses over itself. make sure Edit is set to Y. as defined on the Secondary menu. a confirming message displays. you may want to reimport the file with this feature turned on. with file formats in which healing during import is supported. The Analyze Solid dialog box displays. If no errors are detected. 2. 145 . You can access the Check Solids function from the Analyze Surfaces menu. as defined on the Secondary menu. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. If no errors are detected. Mastercam creates this point using the main system color. a confirming message displays. 3. Surfaces. Solids. Note: You have the following options for marking problem surfaces: ¨ For backups. This function is particularly useful for analyzing the integrity of imported solids and identifying entities that you may need to repair or reconstruct. arcs. Choose Main Menu. Check Solid. you can change the surface color to a color that you select. This function identifies and describes specific errors and highlights their location in the solid drawing. Choose Perform Check. Follow the system prompts. the Check Solid dialog box redisplays and lists up to ten errors. If errors are detected. For example. Checking solid models for errors The Check Solid function analyzes solids for error conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling operations. from the Analyze Solid dialog box. You have the option to create the curves using a color that you select or the main system color. 3.5. Or you may use the Remove Faces function to remove faces having problems identified by the Check Solid function in order to reconstruct new surfaces. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. 4. Only. splines) along the sharp ridges. Doing so is helpful for identifying them in order to fix or recreate them. or from the Solids Manager. The Check Solid dialog box displays. Checking solids from the Analyze Solid dialog box 1. When problem surfaces are detected. Choose Main Menu. you can change the surface color to a color that you select. If errors are detected. ¨ For internal sharp ridges. Analyze. On the Analyze Entity menu. Checking solids from the Analyze Surfaces menu 1. ¨ For self-intersections. which can be subsequently stitched using the From Surfaces function. Analyze. 2.

Analyze. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Right-click on the selected solid. Choose Main Menu. Choose Zoom to selected item to magnify the selected error in the graphics window. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Choose Main Menu. Enter a value for Chord height. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. Select one or more closed. 2.Checking solids from the Solids Manager 1. 2. 3. a confirming message displays. then choose Done. 4. 146 . Choose Main Menu. Disjoint chains are not allowed. area. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. 2. ¨ If ten errors are listed. Solids. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Some of the data may be editable. Mastercam displays the data in a dialog box. Notes on managing error display When errors are listed in the Check Solid dialog box: ¨ ¨ ¨ Select a listed error to highlight its location in the graphics window. Creating a point at the center of gravity of a 2D curve boundary 1. If errors are detected. 3. 2D area. flat chains. Analyzing entity and attribute data 1. then choose Check Solid. Area/volume. Analyze. Select an entity in the graphics window. If no errors are detected. Select a solid in the list. you can reset Maximum number of errors to a higher value (default is 10) and choose Perform Check see if there are more detectable errors. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional entities. Choose Unzoom to return the graphics window to the original display scale. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt Note: If the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu is set to Y.

3. Check Create Pt (Center of Gravity). Select one or more closed. Area/volume. flat chains.4. 5. Disjoint chains are not allowed. Choose Main Menu. Area/volume. Disjoint chains are not allowed. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Analyze. Choose Main Menu. Check Create Pt (Moment of Inertia. 2. 4. 2D area. flat chains. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. 4. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. 2. Creating a point at the moment of inertia about X. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Enter a value for Chord height. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. flat chains. Enter a value for Chord height. then choose Done. 2D area. about X. Analyze. 2. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Area/volume.Y). Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Analyze. Disjoint chains are not allowed. then choose Done. Analyzing 2D curve area 1. 147 . Select one or more closed. 5. 5. 2D area. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. 3. Select one or more closed. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. Check Create Pt (Moment of Inertia. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Creating a point at the moment of inertia about the center of gravity of a 2D curve boundary 1.Y of a 2D curve boundary 1. about CG). Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point.

3. ¨ For surfaces and solid faces. 1. select a solid. Surface area. 2. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam selects it automatically. Analyze. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Dynamic. ¨ For lines. 4. 3. Area/volume. View the data. Analyze. then choose OK to close the dialog box. Analyzing a curve. Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates. 4. Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates and the radius of curvature. Analyzing surface and solid area 1. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. View the data. If prompted. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Choose Main Menu. then choose OK to close the dialog box. and the minimum radius of curvature. Choose Main Menu. and/or solid faces. Solid props. Mastercam displays the point coordinates. then choose Done. Analyzing solid volumes 1. Note: For a solid. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. surface. Select one or more surfaces. or solid face at any position Mastercam displays different data depending on the type of entity you select. Analyze. 3. Area/volume. View the data for Volume. ¨ For arcs and splines. Mastercam analyzes the area of all faces associated with the solid. 148 . Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Enter a value for Chord height. Enter a value for Chord height. solids. 2. the normal coordinates. then choose OK to close the dialog box.

select a solid. 3. Press [Esc] to stop analyzing the selected entity. Choose Main Menu. In the graphics window. Select a line in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. surface. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Creating a point at a solid's center of gravity 1. 4. Area/volume. Analyze. Choose Main Menu. 2. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. If prompted. arc. Mastercam displays the solid’s moment of inertia relative to the selected line and density. 2. If prompted. or solid face. 3. Mastercam selects it automatically. 6. Calculating a solid's mass 1. Analyze. In the field next to the Axis Line button. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. spline. Use the mouse to move the base of the arrow to positions that you want to analyze on the entity. Solid props. Area/volume. Mastercam selects it automatically. Check Create Pt. 4. Calculating a solid's moment of inertia about a selected axis line 1. Mastercam selects it automatically. 149 . Enter a value for Density. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 2. If prompted. 4. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to analyze additional entities. Mastercam updates the value for Mass. Solid props. In the prompt area. Set Density. 3. Solid props. Select a line. select a solid. Area/volume. then choose Axis Line. select a solid. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point.2. Analyze. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected entity. 5. 4. 3. Mastercam displays data relative to the arrow position.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. 6. 4. Type a value for Length. toggle it to Y. 3. Editing the length of a line 1. Choose Main Menu. Enter XYZ coordinates for Endpoint 1 or Endpoint 2. Choose OK to close the dialog box. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 4. toggle it to Y. 150 . Choose Main Menu. then press [Enter]. select the line at the endpoint where you want the length change to be calculated. Enter XYZ coordinates or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window Choose OK to close the dialog box. Editing the position of a line 1. 6. if necessary. 2. Repeat step 4 for the other endpoint. 3.Editing the position of a point 1. 3. 2. 7. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Analyze. Choose OK to close the dialog box. In the graphics window. Analyze. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Analyze. Select a line. 5. toggle it to Y. Select a line. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window. 4. 5. 2. 7. Select a point.

5. Enter a Radius or Diameter value. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose OK. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Analyze. Change the sweep of the arc by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. 5. Mastercam calculates the length from the arc’s ending point. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 2. then choose OK. Select an arc. 5. ¨ Enter an angle value for Startpoint and/or Endpoint or choose the corresponding Move button and enter a point in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Analyze. Select an arc. Enter a value for 3D Length. 4. Editing the size of an arc 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. 3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. toggle it to Y. 4. 6. 4. Analyze. Enter a View number. 3. Choose Main Menu. toggle it to Y. Mastercam calculates the angle from the arc’s ending point. toggle it to Y. 1. Select an arc. Editing the sweep of an arc 1.Editing the construction view of an arc The construction view is the plane that the arc was constructed on (Cplane). 151 .

6. 3. then choose Reduce It. At the prompt. 7. 3. In the prompt area. Choose Main Menu. toggle it to Y. toggle it to Y. 5. Analyze. Select a parametric spline. toggle it to Y. Analyze. 4. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Select an arc. Choose Main Menu. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 8. Select a NURBS spline. 2. choose Yes to save the spline with the reduced number of node points or No to maintain the original spline. then choose Reduce It. Mastercam displays the number of node points removed from the spline. Reducing the amount of data stored for a NURBS spline 1. 6. Choose Main Menu. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Analyze. In the prompt area. Enter a value for Allowable Error. 6. If prompted. 4. 2. or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window.Editing the position of an arc 1. Press [Enter] to continue. 2. Press [Enter] to continue. choose Yes to save the spline with the reduced number of control points or No to maintain the original spline. Reducing the amount of data stored for a parametric spline 1. Enter a value for Allowable Error. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 152 . Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter Center XYZ coordinates. 5. Mastercam displays the number of control points removed from the spline. 4. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Choose OK to exit the dialog box. 5.

Choose OK to close the dialog box. then press [Esc]. choose Keep Tan for one or both endpoints before choosing Move Node. Modifying the position of a node point 1. Choose Move Node. Mastercam displays the message shown below. 3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 5. 4. Flattening a 3D parametric spline 1. then press [Esc] to set the point. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. 7. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. 7. Choosing No tells Mastercam that you want to move the endpoint. 9. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Note: The selected node point sets the depth of the flattened spline. Choose Main Menu. Analyze. 6. 5. Analyze. toggle it to Y. Choose Main Menu.7. 153 . Note: If you select the start/endpoint of a closed spline. 2. Select a parametric spline. 6. 3. 8. toggle it to Y. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Note: To maintain the tangency of the spline’s endpoints. Select a node point on the spline. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to move additional node points. Choosing Yes tells Mastercam that you want to move the startpoint. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a node point. Enter a point for the new node position. 8. Select a 3D parametric spline. then press [Esc] to return to the dialog box. Choose Flatten. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu.

2. toggle it to Y. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. toggle it to Y. Analyze. toggle it to Y. Editing the angle of a draft surface 1. Choose Main Menu. Enter an Angle value. Analyze. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. then choose OK. 2. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu.Editing the offset distance of a surface 1. 3. 4. 3. 154 . Enter an Offset distance value. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 5. ¨ Choose Main Menu. Analyze. Editing the length of a draft surface 1. then choose OK. Analyze. 5. Enter a 3D Length value. Choose Main Menu. then choose OK. Change the sweep of the surface by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. Select a curve-generated revolved surface. Editing the sweep of a revolved surface 1. 3. 2. 4. toggle it to Y. Select a curve-generated draft surface. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Select a curve-generated draft surface. Choose Main Menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Mastercam calculates the angle from the surface’s end angle. 2. Select an offset surface.

recreating or reformatting the entity to Mastercam standards. and edit a variety of drafting entities. Dirty drafting entities are highlighted in red. 155 . ¨ If you modify (e.g. Only associated drafting entities can be regenerated. Creating and editing drafting entities The Drafting menu gives you options for creating and editing drafting entities: dimensions. You can use this option when automatic regeneration is turned off (e. Create. where you can select. Regenerate. Drafting menu options Regenerating associated drafting entities When you create associated drafting entities. whenever a change in geometry requires it. associated and nonassociated. Create. Enter an angle value for Start Angle and/or End Angle. 6. notes. Choosing this option lets you regenerate all associated drafting entities at a particular time. You can access the Regenerate menu by choosing Main Menu. leader lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In particular. labels.. Turning on this option tells Mastercam to regenerate associated drafting entities automatically. you can validate both associated and non-associated drafting entities. However. regenerating an associated dimension means that: ¨ ¨ When you resize an entity. create. changing the size or position of geometry changes the status of associated drafting entities from "clean" to "dirty. during periods of intensive editing).g. Drafting. Choose OK to close the dialog box.g. Drafting. the associated dimension’s value changes accordingly. Mastercam prompts you to convert the dimension to a radius/diameter format or to dissociate it. It runs each entity through the regeneration process.. Regenerating the drafting entity updates its position and/or value so that they once again match the geometry. ¨ Select. trim) an arc so that a dimensioned quadrant point is no longer valid. The Regenerate menu gives you the following options for regenerating associated drafting entities: ¨ Automatic.¨ 5.. In addition to creating or editing specific drafting entities. Choosing this option lets you regenerate all drafting entities." A status of "dirty" means that the position and/or value of the associated entity no longer matches its geometry. You can use this option when automatic regeneration is turned off (e. and hatch entities. ¨ Validate. the associated dimension moves with it. witness lines. Accessing the Drafting menu also puts you in SmartMode. you can also set or edit drafting parameters that affect drafting entities you select or create. during periods of intensive editing) ¨ All. When you move an entity. You can access the Drafting menu by choosing Main Menu. Choosing this option lets you select associated drafting entities to regenerate at a particular time.

Creating drafting dimensions Mastercam provides two menus for creating drafting dimensions: the Drafting menu (SmartMode) and the Dimension menu. ¨ Drafting menu (SmartMode). The Drafting menu, when displayed, puts you into SmartMode, an integrated drafting environment where you can create all dimensions except baseline, chained, or ordinate. You can also create other entities such as notes, labels, leaders, and hatch entities from the Drafting menu. To access the Drafting menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. When to use. Because of its flexibility in allowing you to create or edit many different kinds of drafting entities, you will usually find it more convenient and efficient (fewer mouse clicks) to create dimensions (except baseline, chained, or ordinate) in SmartMode than from the Dimension menu—especially when you are creating or editing different types of dimensions in succession. You must use SmartMode to create perpendicular dimensions, which cannot be created from the Dimension menu. ¨ Dimension menu. The Dimension menu gives you options for creating specific types of dimensions. You can use the Dimension menu to create all dimensions except perpendicular. To access the Dimension menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension. Then choose the option (Horizontal, Vertical, etc.) that corresponds to the dimension you want to create. When to use. If you are creating multiple instances of a particular dimension type (horizontal, vertical, etc.), you may find it more efficient to choose that option from the Dimension menu than to create the dimension in SmartMode. You must use the Dimension menu to create baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions, as these dimensions cannot be created in SmartMode (from the Drafting menu). Note: You cannot select, reposition, or edit existing dimensions from the Dimension menu. Instead, display the Drafting menu, then use SmartMode and the Quick Edit options to select, reposition, and edit dimensions you wish to change.

Creating dimensions in SmartMode (Drafting menu)
Selecting drafting entities in SmartMode SmartMode is an integrated drafting environment, in which you can create different dimensions as well as select and edit existing dimensions and drafting entities. In this environment, the geometric or drafting entities you select activate the appropriate drafting function, allowing you to create or edit drafting entities, as summarized in the following table and the notes below. Notes: ¨ Selecting an existing drafting entity in SmartMode lets you edit that drafting entity, even if the entity was not created in SmartMode (e.g., a baseline, chained, or ordinate dimension, a note, or a label). ¨ To activate the point dimension function in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. You can, however, select and edit an existing point dimension in SmartMode.

156

Creating dimensions in SmartMode: Overview As a dynamic environment for creating drafting dimensions, SmartMode allows you to create point, linear (horizontal, vertical, perpendicular, or tangent), angular, and circular, dimensions depending on the points or entities you select and the sequence in which you select them. The following table summarizes the selection sequences you can use to create dimensions in SmartMode.

Note: To create point dimensions in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box.

157

Creating linear dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode, you can create horizontal, vertical, or parallel linear dimensions for selected entities in the graphics window. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text in different directions to display available linear dimension types: horizontal, vertical, or parallel. (If you are dragging a dimension associated with a horizontal or vertical line, its type is locked by default.) Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. 4. While the desired dimension type is displayed, press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type.

158

5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. Note: You can also create horizontal, vertical, and parallel dimensions from the Dimension menu. Creating horizontal dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Horizontal option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Horizontal. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type (horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text. ¨ You can also create and edit horizontal dimensions in SmartMode. Creating vertical dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Vertical option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Vertical. Enter two points or select a line. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Horizontal dimension function.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Vertical dimension function.

159

Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type (horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text. ¨ You can also create and edit vertical dimensions in SmartMode. Creating parallel dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Parallel option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Parallel. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional parallel dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Parallel dimension function.

Creating perpendicular dimensions in SmartMode Perpendicular dimensions measure the perpendicular distance between any of the following: ¨ ¨ ¨ A point and a line Two points and a parallel line Two parallel lines

In SmartMode, you can create perpendicular linear dimensions for selected entities in the graphics window. 1. 2. ¨ ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. Select either: One point and a line Two points and a parallel line Two parallel lines

160

you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. While the desired perpendicular dimension is displayed. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. Note: While dragging the dimension text. (To select the two points you must first choose the Quick Edit Point mode option while dragging the linear dimension associated with the first line selected. 161 . 3. whose angular dimension you wish to display. Auto Center must be turned off while the dimension is locked. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension into the current quadrant. Drafting.) Note: Before entering a point. Create. 3. While the dimension is in the desired quadrant. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available perpendicular dimensions for the selected points and/or lines. You can add connecting tails out-of quadrant text by checking the Add tail to angular leaders parameter in the Witness/Leaders/Arrows tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. Select either: Two non-parallel lines Three points (first point selected become the vertex) * A line and two points. 5. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Drag the dimension into the quadrant. 2. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 5. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. 1.Note: Before entering a point. Creating angular dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. Note: While dragging the dimension text. 4. you can create angular dimensions for selected entities. Note: To drag the dimension text outside of its quadrant. relative to the selected lines or points. * * Choose Main Menu. For an example and detailed information about angular dimensions. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 4. see Creating angular dimensions (Dimension menu). press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the current dimension. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position.

To change the measured dimension between diameter and radius. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 4. 2. 6. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. or vertical) is displayed. If you selected an existing circular dimension. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. For an example and detailed information about circular dimensions. 1. Note: While dragging the dimension text. 1. as follows: ¨ ¨ ¨ If you selected a circle. a radius dimension is displayed. 5. see Creating circular dimensions (Dimension menu). a diameter dimension is displayed. horizontal. For an example and detailed information about tangent dimensions. Drafting. the dimension’s last specified style is displayed. If you selected an arc (<360 degrees). Creating tangent dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. or vertical. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type. choose the Quick Edit (R)ad or (D)ia options. see Tangent dimensions. Drafting. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available dimension types: circular. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. you can create circular dimensions for selected entities. While the desired dimension type (circular. 2. Create. Note: The default dimension depends on the selected object. you can create tangent dimensions for selected entities.Creating circular dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. Select either: A point and an arc/circle A line and an arc/circle 162 . Create. horizontal. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. 3. Select either: A circle (or two points on the same circle) An arc (or two points on the same arc) Note: Before entering a point.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional point dimensions. Drafting. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Choose Main Menu. 5. Note: Before entering a point. Enter two points or select a line.¨ Two arc/circles 3. 1. Note: While dragging the dimension text. 4. you can create point dimensions for selected entities. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available dimension types (vertical. the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. Enter a point Note: Before entering a point. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. Creating point dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 1. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Horizontal. Creating dimensions from the Dimension menu Creating horizontal dimensions (Dimension menu) Horizontal dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the horizontal distance between two points. 3. as needed. Note: To enable the point dimension function in SmartMode. then click to set its position. Create. While the desired tangent dimension is displayed. Choose Main Menu. 4. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. The following example shows a horizontal dimension: Choosing the Horizontal option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal dimensions. see Creating point dimensions (Dimension menu). Dimension. then click to set its position. Create. 2. For an example and detailed information about point dimensions. Drafting. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. horizontal) and tangent points. 163 . 2.

Note: Before entering a point. vertical. as you drag the dimension text. Parallel. Drafting. as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Vertical dimension function. Creating vertical dimensions (Dimension menu) Vertical dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the vertical distance between two points.Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical dimensions. 1. 164 . 3. Creating parallel dimensions (Dimension menu) Parallel dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the actual distance between two points and are parallel to the axis that runs between the two points. parallel). you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Create. Drafting. The following example shows a vertical dimension: Choosing the Vertical option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical dimensions. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Enter two points or select a line. Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal dimensions. 2. 4. as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Horizontal dimension function. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Create. 2. The following example shows a parallel dimension: Choosing the Parallel option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel dimensions. Enter two points or select a line. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu. when available. Choose Main Menu. ¨ You can also create and edit horizontal dimensions in SmartMode. Note: Before entering a point. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Dimension. 5. then click to set its position. then click to set its position. 5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. allows the dimension to change type (horizontal. 1. Vertical. Dimension.

Press [Esc] to exit the baseline dimension function. 6. If desired. 165 . the linked baseline dimensions inherit that associativity. Creating baseline dimensions Baseline dimensions are linear dimensions that reference an existing linear dimension. 4. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the first baseline dimension that you want to create. 5. Select a linear dimension to be the base. which serves as a "base" line. If the original (base) dimension is associated to a geometric entity. If you enter a point to the right of the original dimension’s midpoint. 5. Baseline. When you create a series of baseline dimensions. Depending on your drafting settings (Settings tab in the Drafting Globals dialog box). 4. If Baseline Increments: Automatic is checked. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Drafting. Choose Main Menu. then click to set its position. 7. You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. and vice-versa. Press [Esc] to exit the Parallel dimension function. where you enter the endpoint for the first baseline dimension determines which witness line of the base dimension serves as the reference entity for all subsequent baseline dimensions in the series. Mastercam uses the witness line to the left as the reference entity. repeat steps 2–6 to create another set of baseline dimensions using a different linear dimension. Choosing the Baseline option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more series of baseline dimensions. as needed. Press [Esc] to complete the current baseline dimension series. 2. the dimension is set at the fixed baseline increment as soon as you enter the endpoint (step 3). Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional parallel dimensions. 3.Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. or zero distance. The Point Entry menu displays. Create. 1. 8. Note: You can drag the dimension text and use the Quick Edit options only if the Baseline Increments: Automatic parameter is not checked in the Settings tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. Dimension. you can set baseline dimensions at pre-determined increments or in a position you choose. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional baseline dimensions using the same linear dimension.

4. 7. Chained dimensions are not associated with a geometric entity. While you drag a circular dimension. Dimension. Press [Esc] to exit the chained dimension function. When you create each new dimension in a chain. This dimension is used as a "base. Choosing the Circular option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more circular dimensions. Repeat steps 2–6 to create another set of chained dimensions using a different linear dimension. Select a linear dimension. Where you enter the endpoint for the new dimension determines which witness line of the previous dimension becomes the new dimension’s reference entity. then click to set its position. a vertical dimension is drawn. Mastercam calculates the midpoint of the previously entered dimension. 6. beginning with the selection of an existing linear dimension. Mastercam uses the previous dimension’s right witness line as the first witness line of the new dimension. Drafting. and vice versa. even if the original base dimension selected for the chain is associated. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 1. the dimension type and/or format changes (unless it is locked) as follows: ¨ ¨ To the right and left of the arc or circle. 5." a radius/diameter (rotating) dimension is drawn. The format of a circular dimension can be linear (horizontal or vertical) or radius/diameter (rotating)." or zero distance for the first chained dimension. If you enter a point to the right of the previous dimension’s midpoint. Press [Esc] to complete the current chain. Choose Main Menu. The Point Entry menu displays. Creating circular dimensions (Dimension menu) Circular dimensions measure the diameter or the radius of arcs and circles. 166 . depending on the position to which you drag the dimension. Chained. 2. Above and below the arc or circle.Creating chained dimensions Chained dimensions are linear dimensions that build on one another. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the first chained dimension that you want to create. 8. Each chained dimension. Create. a horizontal dimension is drawn. in turn. ¨ Inside the arc or circle or outside any of the four 45-degree "quadrants. Choosing the Chained option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more sets of chained dimensions. becomes the base for the next dimension in the chain. You can position the dimension text inside or outside the arc. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to chain each new dimension to the previous one. 3.

then choose Relative from the Angular dimension menu to display the Point Entry menu. as follows: If you selected a circle. 6. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the circular dimension function. 2. Create. Angular dimensions from three points can be created only in SmartMode. If you selected an arc (<360 degrees). ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. 3. as needed. 2. 7. Drafting. two points and a line. Repeat steps 2–5 to create additional circular dimensions. 1. or vertical. Dimension. Select an arc or a circle. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the quadrant. Dimension. Angular. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension type. Note: While dragging the dimension text. or vertical) is displayed. Create. Enter a point. 5. 4. three points. Do either of the following: Select two non-parallel lines. Circular. then Release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. The following example shows an angular dimension: Choosing the Angular option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more angular dimensions. Mastercam displays the dimension.1. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available types and formats: circular. Choosing the Quick Edit (R)ad or (D)ia options changes the measured dimension between diameter and radius. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. While the desired dimension type or format (radius/diameter. a radius dimension is displayed. or a line and a horizon (a virtual line defined by specifying an angle relative to the X axis of the Cplane). ¨ Choose Main Menu. 167 . While the desired quadrant is displayed. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available quadrants. ¨ Select a line. a diameter dimension is displayed. horizontal. Note: While dragging the dimension text. 3. Drafting. and press [Enter]. specify an angle (0 to 180 degrees) in the prompt area. horizontal. Creating angular dimensions (Dimension menu) Angular dimensions measure the angle formed by: two non-parallel lines.

Create. Ordinate. The base dimension is an initial ordinate dimension that you create or select and whose position Mastercam designates as 0. Repeat steps 2-4 to create additional tangent dimensions. or another arc/circle. While non-linear in format. Repeat steps 2 – 5 to create additional angular dimensions. as needed. Creating ordinate dimensions Ordinate dimensions are non-linear dimensions that measure distance from a common base dimension. ¨ ¨ 4. Creating horizontal ordinate dimensions Horizontal ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal distance. Create.5. as needed. all children of that dimension become dirty as well.0000. Dimension. Press [Esc] to exit the tangent dimension function. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. or zero distance. 5. Creating tangent dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Tangent option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more tangent dimensions. or arc/circle. Ordinate dimensions are composed of a base (also referred to as a "parent") dimension and one or more secondary (also referred to as "child") dimensions. Select a point. if a change in geometry causes an associated base ordinate dimension to become dirty. Dimension. Base or child ordinate dimensions may be associated with geometry independently of each other. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 7. 6. along the X axis of the current Cplane. Press [Esc] to exit the angular dimension function. Tangent. select an arc/circle. For each child dimension. 3. 168 . If you selected an arc/circle in step 2. You can access the Ordinate Dimension menu by choosing Main Menu. line. 6. Drafting. Mastercam calculates its distance from the base dimension to determine its text value. For examples and information about creating and using tangent dimensions. then Release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. Drafting. from a common base point. see Tangent dimensions. The following example shows a horizontal ordinate dimension. then click to set its position. 1. line. The Ordinate Dimension menu gives you options for creating ordinate dimensions. 2. Do either of the following: If you selected a point or a line in step 2. However. Choose Main Menu. select a point. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. ordinate dimensions can display tolerances.

Choose Main Menu.0000. Drafting. 2. Enter a point. then click to set its position. Creating vertical ordinate dimensions Choosing the Vertical option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical ordinate dimensions. this base point is 0. Press [Esc] to exit the horizontal ordinate dimension function. For the initial ordinate dimension. Vertical. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Dimension. For the initial ordinate dimension. 1. Create. 3. The Point Entry menu displays. as needed. The Point Entry menu displays. 5. this base point is 0. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.0000. Horizontal. Ordinate. Enter a point. 169 . Create. 2. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional ordinate (child) dimensions. Dimension. Choose Main Menu. 4. Ordinate.Choosing the Horizontal option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal ordinate dimensions. 1. Drafting.

Press [Esc] to exit the parallel ordinate dimension function. then drag/edit and position the dimension text. 1. the second defines the dimension orientation. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional ordinate (child) dimensions. Create. 2. The Point Entry menu displays. Drafting. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. or child. then click to set its position. Press [Esc] to exit the vertical ordinate dimension function. as needed. Adding ordinate dimensions to an existing base dimension Choosing the Existing option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you add secondary. Ordinate.3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 5. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 5. 4. Enter two points: the first defines the initial ordinate dimension (0. 170 . Dimension. Creating parallel ordinate dimensions Choosing the Parallel option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel ordinate dimensions. enter a point. then click to set its position. 4. Parallel. For each additional ordinate (child) dimension you wish to create.0000). ordinate dimensions to an existing ordinate base dimension that you select and which Mastercam designates as 0. Choose Main Menu. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window.0000. as described in step 3. 3.

Existing. Ordinate. and surface curves. Press [Esc] to exit the existing ordinate dimension function. and/or the endpoints of lines. 4. or choose Select to enter a base point by clicking in the graphics window. 7. splines. Create. however.1. 2. Dimension. as needed. then choose Done. ¨ ¨ Check one or both of the following (you must check at least one): Horizontal to create horizontal ordinate dimensions Vertical to create vertical ordinate dimensions 4. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 1. 6. Type coordinates for the base point (0. Window. Using this method can save time by letting you create many ordinate dimensions at once while eliminating the need to enter individual points. 3. Create. 3.0000) in the X and Y text boxes. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional ordinate dimensions. Ordinate. Dimension. You can create dimensions at the center points of arcs. The Ordinate Dimension: Automatic dialog box opens. child dimensions are associated with the base. 5. Select an existing base ordinate dimension (0. Enter a point for an additional ordinate dimension. Drafting. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.0000). Drafting. Select entities to dimension from the Entity Selection menu. check or clear parameters. Once you set a base point and other dimension parameters. Ordinate dimensions created using this method are not associated with any geometry. Choose OK. then click to set its position. Under Points. to achieve desired dimension format. Mastercam automatically creates a base (parent) dimension and all possible child dimensions relative to this point based on the selected parameters and entities. 2. Under Options. as desired. 6. 171 . the endpoints of arcs. check one or more options (you must check at least one) to specify what kinds of points to dimension. Choose Main Menu. Entry is required. You have the option to create horizontal and/or vertical ordinate dimensions. Choose Main Menu. Creating multiple ordinate dimensions automatically Choosing the Window option from the Ordinate Dimension menu opens a dialog box that lets you create multiple sets of ordinate dimensions from a common origin (base point) based on parameters that you set for entities that you select. 5.

1. Create. Align. 3. Note: Before entering a point. 2. as needed. Ordinate. Point. Create. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Choose Main Menu. Note. if aligning the ordinate dimensions interferes with other entities in the drawing. 5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. However.Aligning ordinate dimensions Choosing the Align option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you select. 2. Create. Dimension. 1. Select and drag an existing ordinate dimension (base or child). 172 . Drafting. and align the text of all related ordinate dimensions along a common axis. 4. reposition. then click to set its position. 3. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Creating a drafting note You can create a drafting note by choosing the Note option from the Drafting menu. The text of all related ordinate elements snaps into alignment and moves together. then click to set its position and exit the Align function. Choose Main Menu. The following example shows a point dimension: Choosing the Point option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more point dimensions. 1. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point. The Note dialog box opens. Aligning ordinate dimensions can improve neatness in a drawing while highlighting their relatedness. you can use the Quick Edit (A)lign option to move a selected ordinate dimension independently from the others. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Creating point dimensions (Dimension menu) Point dimensions identify the coordinates for any given position in the graphics window. Drafting. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional point dimensions. Dimension. Drafting. Press [Esc] to exist the point dimension function.

4. press [Enter] to create line or paragraph breaks. 173 . The Point Entry menu displays. Drag the note text to a desired position in the graphics window. straight drafting lines (no arrowheads) used to indicate boundaries or connect entities. 5. then click Open. drag and position each additional note copy. Locate and select a file containing the text (ASCII. Mastercam creates witness lines automatically when you create dimensions. Drafting. Witness. Click Add Symbol to open the Select Symbol dialog box. If desired. Freestanding witness lines can be associated with the geometry selected during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity.2. In dimensions. Enter note text in one or more of the following ways: ¨ Key In. Create. endpoints. witness lines are paired parallel lines that indicate the end points of a dimension. Choose OK. quadrant points. If you selected Multiple Notes in step 3. then click the symbol you wish to enter. Choose Main Menu. center points. Unless you turn off the display of witness lines (Drafting Globals dialog box). You can create freestanding witness lines anywhere in the graphics window. then click to set its position. ¨ Symbol. 1. etc. ¨ File. unformatted) you wish enter. ¨ ¨ Select either of the following: Single Note to create one instance of the note. then press [Esc] to exit the Note function. such as midpoints. Click Load File to open the Specify File Name to Read dialog box. Multiple Notes to create multiple copies of the same note. Type the text directly into the Note text box. The Note dialog box closes. 3. Creating freestanding witness lines Witness lines are simple. You can also create freestanding witness lines by choosing Witness from the Drafting menu. The following example shows witness lines in a dimension. Note: You can choose Properties to edit the note’s text properties using the Drafting Globals dialog box.

2. 3. Drafting. then choose Done. endpoints. Leader. Beginning with the arrowhead position. Creating freestanding leader lines Leader lines are drafting lines with single arrowheads that function as pointers. Press [Esc]. etc. as needed. You can create freestanding leader lines anywhere in the graphics window. 5. Editing global parameters for selected drafting entities Choosing the Multi Edit option on the Drafting menu lets you use the Drafting Globals dialog box to edit parameters for one or more drafting entities that you select. Repeat step 2 to create additional witness lines. Drafting. Create. 3. Choose Main Menu. from an entity. 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional single or segmented leaders. Select one or more entities that you want to edit. enter two points to create a single leader line. Multi edit. Create. Choose Main Menu. 3. In Mastercam. You can use this option to create single or segmented leader lines. Mastercam creates the witness line between them. Freestanding leader lines can be associated with the geometry selected during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity. 2. leader lines most often point from a dimension’s text to its witness lines. Unless you turn off the display of leader lines in the Drafting Globals dialog box. 1. Mastercam creates leader lines automatically when you create dimensions. as needed. enter additional points to create a segmented leader line. quadrant points. select the Settings tab and choose one of the following options: ¨ ¨ ¨ Get globals from disk file Get globals from entity Get default globals 174 . such as midpoints. 4. To get settings from a file. or from the system defaults. Press [Esc] when done. The Drafting Globals dialog box opens. Enter two points.2. center points. The Point Entry menu displays. Mastercam creates a leader line connecting all entered points. The following example shows a leader line in a dimension: You can also create freestanding leader lines by choosing the Leader option from the Drafting menu. Leader lines are also used with note text to create labels. The Entity Selection menu displays.

regeneration. ¨ To keep settings for future use. For additional help with individual parameter settings. 1. and labels. notes. Choose OK to close the Drafting Globals dialog box and apply settings to selected entities. Choose Edit text to turn on the edit text function (there should be a ‘Y’ following the option to show that it is turned on). 2. To modify individual settings. Create. select the appropriate tab and set desired parameters. display. ¨ Edit a single drafting entity (Quick Edit (G)lobals option). ¨ Select the Dimension Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of dimension Select the Note Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of note and label text. and arrowheads associated with dimensions. ¨ Set initial drafting parameters and save them to the Mastercam configuration file (Screen Configure option) Editing drafting text Turning on the Drafting menu’s Edit text function allows you to edit the text of drafting dimensions. witness lines. ¨ In addition to editing multiple drafting entities. Note: For additional dialog box help. ¨ text. ¨ Select the Leaders/Witness/Arrows tab to set parameters affecting the display and appearance of leader lines. Note: Choosing Edit text again turns off the edit text function (Y changes to N). 175 . notes. ¨ Select the Settings tab to set miscellaneous drafting parameters affecting associativity. then click a parameter. choose the Help button on each tab. you can save the new drafting settings to a file before closing the Drafting Globals dialog box. as described above. Drafting. Click the ? in the upper-right corner. and tolerances. Notes: ¨ You cannot select or edit hatch entities. display conditions. Choose Main Menu. as follows (only tabs and parameters relevant to selected entities will be available): ¨ Select the Dimension Attributes tab to set parameters affecting dimension format. 5.4. and baseline increments. you can use the Drafting Globals dialog box to: ¨ Set current drafting parameters that apply to all new entities you may create during the drawing session (Drafting Globals option). and labels without changing the entity’s position in the graphics window.

If necessary. Drafting. Choose OK. edit. In either dialog box. In the Angle box. ¨ ¨ 4. ¨ You cannot edit a hatch entity in the graphics window. spacing. Hatch. type a different value for the angle of the hatch lines.3. 4. 1. Select a hatch pattern from the Pattern list. Then create a new hatch entity. 2. The Hatch dialog box opens. For more information see Related Topics. change the spacing and/or angle settings. then choose OK to close the dialog box and apply changes to the selected entity. where you can create up to eight user-defined hatch patterns (in addition to the eight standard hatch 176 . Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Create. Mastercam fills each closed boundary with the hatch pattern with the exception of nested boundaries. Type text changes in the appropriate text box. using the above procedure. 5. Creating hatch entities Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you create hatch entities by specifying a hatch pattern. type a different value for spacing between hatch lines. and rotation angle for closed curve boundaries that you select. you can insert special characters (choose Add Symbol or Ø). Note: You can also edit drafting text while dragging an entity by choosing the Quick Edit (T)ext option. 3. Select one or more closed chains. or delete a user-defined cross-hatch pattern. note. then choose Done. 5. regardless of the number of boundaries that you select. Note: If you want to define. or label to open the Edit Dimension Text dialog box (if a dimension is selected) or the Note dialog box (if a note or label is selected). first delete the existing hatch entity. Notes: ¨ Mastercam creates one hatch entity. choose User defined hatch patterns. Defining a hatch pattern Choosing User defined hatch patterns in the Hatch dialog box opens the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit the text of additional drafting entities. To change a hatch entity. Choose Main Menu. as follows: In the Spacing box. Note: In the Note dialog box. Select a drafting dimension. you can also load text from a file (choose Load File). which form holes in the pattern.

The Hatch dialog box opens. Editing a hatch pattern Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you edit the hatch and crosshatch lines of an existing user-defined hatch pattern. you can specify up to 16 hatch lines and 16 crosshatch lines. Solid Line. 4. Choose New Hatch to select the next available number of a new pattern you wish to add. 2. or Broken Line. Choose Main Menu. Create. then choose either Blank Line. Choose OK to save your work and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. double-click the user-defined pattern you wish to edit. 2.patterns supplied by Mastercam). 3. select the number of the user-defined pattern you wish to Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. Repeat the previous step for each line you wish to modify. edit. Drafting. 1. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens with that pattern already selected as the Hatch Number. ¨ ¨ 5. 177 . The Hatch dialog box opens. Choose User defined hatch patterns. Drafting. Hatch. For each user-defined pattern. Choose User defined hatch patterns. Create.) 1. 3. Shortcut: In the Pattern list. Specify new Hatch Lines and Cross Hatch Lines as follows: Choose New Line. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined hatch number is selected. or Broken Line. Choose Main Menu. ¨ ¨ 5. (You cannot edit the standard hatch patterns supplied by Mastercam. Repeat the previous step for each line you wish to add. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined Hatch Number is selected. Hatch. then choose either Blank Line. You can then proceed to step 4. Solid Line. Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. Modify Hatch Lines and Cross Hatch Lines as follows: Select a number from the Line # list. 4. Choose OK to save your changes and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. In the Hatch Number drop-down list.

4. Choose Main Menu. The Drafting Globals dialog box opens. 2. for the remainder of the current drafting session. The deleted hatch number reverts to Undefined. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens with that pattern already selected. select the Settings tab and choose one of the following options: ¨ ¨ ¨ 3. Shortcut: In the Pattern list. The Hatch dialog box opens. The settings you enter override. display. Select the Dimension Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of dimension 178 . 2. Setting these parameters before creating entities can save you time later on by minimizing the need to edit or recreate entities with the properties you want. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined hatch number is selected. Choose OK to save the change and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. 1. Choose Main Menu. ¨ text. or from the system defaults. Setting global drafting parameters for the current drawing session Choosing the Globals option on the Drafting menu opens the Drafting Globals dialog box and lets you set drafting parameters and preferences that apply to all drafting entities you subsequently create during the current drawing session. Globals. initial drafting configuration settings loaded when you started Mastercam or initialized the current drawing session. Hatch. To get settings from a file. Choose User defined hatch patterns. as follows: ¨ Select the Dimension Attributes tab to set parameters affecting dimension format. Create. from an entity. select the number of the user-defined pattern you wish to delete. You can then proceed to step 4. Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. Drafting. 5. Drafting. and tolerances. double-click the user-defined pattern you wish to edit. In the Hatch Number drop-down list. 1. Choose Delete Hatch to the remove the selected user-defined pattern. Create. Get globals from disk file Get globals from entity Get default globals To modify individual settings. 3.Deleting a hatch pattern Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you delete an existing user-defined hatch pattern. select the appropriate tab and set desired parameters.

Note: For additional help with individual parameter settings. witness lines. you can use the Drafting Globals dialog box to: ¨ ¨ Edit multiple drafting entities (Drafting Multi edit option).¨ Select the Note Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of note and label text. Notes: ¨ To keep settings for future use. ¨ Set initial drafting parameters and save them to the Mastercam configuration file (Screen Configure option) 179 . 4. ¨ Select the Leaders/Witness/Arrows tab to set parameters affecting the display and appearance of leader lines. Choose OK to close the Drafting Globals dialog box and use the new settings for creating drafting entities during the current drawing session. notes. regeneration. click the ? in the upper-right corner. ¨ Select the Settings tab to set miscellaneous drafting parameters affecting associativity. and arrowheads associated with dimensions. then click a parameter. as described above. and baseline increments. display conditions. ¨ In addition to setting drafting parameters for the current drawing session. you can save the current drafting settings to a file before closing the Drafting Globals dialog box. Edit a single drafting entity (Quick Edit (G)lobals option). and labels.

always maintaining each solid as a single entity. A solid is a closed. Step 2: Create additional operations. rather than building a model from a series of unrelated entities. sphere. you can perform subsequent operations to modify the solid. Creating a solid model in Mastercam Through a few easy steps. which are a collection of curves. Because a solid is a closed. when a Trim or Boolean (Remove. called the base operation. About solid modeling Solid modeling refers to the process of creating solids.Master cam Solids The Solids menu gives you options for performing solid operations to create and modify solid models and for managing solid operations. This characteristic makes solid modeling easy because the system handles the complexities of the model behind the scenes. revolving. The system automatically performs these actions for you. and surface models. which are a collection of surfaces. For example. Mastercam does not support creation of disjoint bodies. creates the solid. Common) operation would result in disjoint bodies. organized model. To access the Solids menu. a solid model is a single entity. and even combine it with another solid—it still remains one entity. The steps outlined below give you an overview of the process of solid modeling in Mastercam. or lofting chains of curves. Mastercam is able to keep track of the inside and outside of the model for you. block. you can add fillets to a solid. like molding a piece of clay. regardless of its complexity. However. See the related topics for more information. such as a cylinder. Mastercam creates one or more bricks (solids with no operation history) to represent the disjoint pieces. which define the closed boundary of the solid. You can create a base operation by taking one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ ¨ Define a solid by extruding. or torus. You can perform the following functions to modify a solid: ¨ ¨ Remove material by making one or more cuts on a target solid Add material by creating one or more bosses on a target solid 180 . cone. sweeping. You work with a solid model as a whole. A solid is defined by one or more operations. you can create and machine a solid model in Mastercam. A base operation is always listed as the first operation under the solid in the Solids Manager. You can create multiple solids in a file. The first operation. You can then adapt these steps to create your own solid model. see Solids menu options and Reading a Parasolid file. You never have to determine the surfaces that you want to keep or trim when you perform operations on the solid. Step 1: Create a base operation. then hollow it out. Define a solid using primitive (pre-defined) shapes. Import a solid from a parasolid file. three-dimensional geometric entity that occupies a region of space and that consists of one or more faces. It cannot be moved in or deleted from the operation list. Note: For additional information on these functions. choose Solids from the Main Menu. Unlike wireframe models. Once the base operation has been created.

You can correct dirty operations by regenerating them. edit an operation’s components (geometry and parameters). when rechaining a fillet operation. ¨ Dirty: Describes an operation whose defining parameters and/or geometry have changed and no longer match the associated solid. This condition applies to all newly created operations and to operations that have been successfully regenerated. Step 3: Manage solid operations. Mastercam marks each dirty operation and its associated solid with a red X in the Solids Manager. For example. you would need to create a new fillet operation on that solid. which prevents it from being regenerated.¨ ¨ ¨ Smooth solid edges by adding a radius (fillet) Bevel (chamfer) solid edges Hollow out (shell) solids and optionally cut entry holes ¨ Perform Boolean functions: add solids together. and regenerate all or individual solids. remove solids from one another. find common solid volumes. its operations should be clean. For more information. you cannot copy operations or move them to a different solid. Mastercam associates it with the solid that it creates or modifies. Solid associativity Solid associativity is the dependent relationship between a solid and the operations that define it. ¨ Invalid: Describes an operation that fails due to a problem in its geometry and/or parameters. see Managing solid operations. Deleting geometry that defines an operation is a common cause of invalid operations. To fillet edges on a different solid. For a solid to be stable and current. etc. all of the new edges that you select must be on the same solid where the operation was originally defined. Note: For additional information on the Solids Manager. draft face. You can use Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Lathe to create toolpaths directly on solid geometry. fillet. check a solid model at various points in its development. Associativity eliminates the need to recreate a solid each time you modify it. ¨ ¨ Draft solid faces Trim solids to a plane or surface Note: For additional information on these functions. see Solids menu options. The following terms describe a solid operation and the current state of its associativity: ¨ Clean: Describes an operation whose defining parameters and geometry match the associated solid. Step 4: Machine the solid. This association can be broken only by deleting the operation. see Mill toolpaths and Lathe toolpaths. you can regenerate the solid to incorporate your changes. The Solids Manager lists the operations that were performed to define each solid in the current file. When you perform a solid operation such as extrude. After editing an operation’s components (geometry and parameters). You can check the location of an operation in the model.. Because an operation is associated with the solid that it creates or modifies. Mastercam marks each invalid operation and its associated solid with a red question 181 .

2. Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane. then regenerating the operation. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. Solids. Mastercam deletes the fillet operation as well because the edge that defined the fillet operation no longer exists. Select one or more chains. 4. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point. whether you combine operations. cuts. 5. Set the extrusion direction. 3. then choose Done. choose Cut Body. 1. In the Solids Manager. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). choose Create Body. ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. The number of resulting solids. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. the fillet operation is dependent on the cut operation. select Combine Operations. If you delete the cut operation. Choose Main Menu. You can try to correct an invalid operation by making changes to the operation’s parameters and/or geometry. or bosses on an existing body. 182 . When you perform a Boolean operation.mark (?) in the Solids Manager. For example. if a cut operation results in a new face and you fillet that face. Extrude. and other parameters that further define the results. clear Combine Operations. 6. distance. a defining operation always precedes a dependent operation in the operation list. To remove material from an existing body. Mastercam associates the tool body with the target body. whether the chains are nested. then choose OK. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. Associativity does not exist between individual solids in a Mastercam file unless those solids are used in Boolean combinations. Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. and what construction method you use. To add material to an existing body. Set additional parameters as needed. cuts on an existing body. choose Add Boss. Associativity can also exist between some solid operations. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4).

Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. However. Normal One : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains normal to one chain that you select. gives you options for changing the extrusion direction. Normal : Sets the extrusion direction normal to each selected chain of curves based on the chaining direction and the right-hand rule. which displays after you select the chains of curves to extrude.¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. or boss. The default extrusion direction is normal to each chain of curves that you select to extrude. a direction arrow also displays on each selected chain of curves to show the current extrusion direction. You can also access this menu from the Extrude Chain dialog box if you need to edit the extrusion direction at a later time. Setting the extrusion direction The extrusion direction is the direction that the system drives the shape of the selected chains of curves to form an extruded solid. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. The endpoint closest to where you select the line functions as the endpoint of the 183 . cut. although you can reverse the sense of the normal vector. Note: When using the thin-wall construction method. The Extrusion Direction menu. This function tells Mastercam to extrude all selected chains in the same plane. ConstZ : Sets the extrusion direction according to the positive Z axis of the current construction plane. you must use the normal direction. When this menu displays. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. Line : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains based on the direction of a line that you select in the graphics window. It is set so that the chain is counter-clockwise about the normal vector. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. The sense of the normal vector is determined by the chaining direction and the righthand rule.

Done : Accepts the draft direction indicated by the direction arrow on the reference geometry. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. 3. then choose Done. and the Revolve menu displays. cuts on an existing body. choose Cut Body. whether the chains are nested. 4. Reverse One : Reverses the current extrusion direction of one chain that you select. Solids. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. The points are not associative. whether you combine operations. The line is not associative. 2. 184 . Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. the solid does not update if the points that you enter are actual point entities and they change. 6.direction vector. Reverse It : Reverses the current extrusion direction of all selected chains. therefore. The number of resulting solids. choose Add Boss. and what construction method you use. then choose Done to set the axis. 5. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). The first point that you enter functions as the endpoint of the direction vector. Two Points : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains based on the direction of the axis defined by two points that you enter using the Point Entry menu. cuts. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. To remove material from an existing body. ¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed. Revolve. choose Create Body. and the extrusion direction moves away from this point along the line. and the extrusion direction moves away from this point toward the second point that you enter. or bosses on an existing body. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. Select one or more chains. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. Choose Main Menu. Note: The extrusion direction cannot be parallel to the plane defined by the selected chains of curves because you cannot extrude a chain sideways. 1. select Combine Operations. therefore. To create new solid bodies. the solid does not update if the line changes.

Reverse : Reverses the current rotation direction. Set additional parameters as needed. clear Combine Operations. The start and end angles are then measured in a positive sense about the axis. planar chains of curves. which displays after you select a line to use as the rotation axis. to create one or more new solid bodies. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. When this menu displays. 7. gives you options for selecting a different line and for reversing the rotation direction. cuts on an existing body. a direction arrow also displays on the selected line to show the current rotation direction. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies. called section chains. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. Axis : Returns you to the graphics window where you can select a new line to use as the rotation axis. Selecting a rotation axis The rotation axis is the line about which the system revolves the chains of curves to form a revolved solid. The Revolve menu. which sets the rotation direction. However. Note: The revolve operation fails if the axis line causes the solid to self-intersect. Note: The rotation direction follows the right-hand rule . then choose OK. The default rotation direction is determined when you select a line to use as the rotation axis. including a line on the selected chain of curves. You can select any line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. You can also access this menu from the Revolve Chain dialog box if you need to edit the rotation axis at a later time. The system sweeps chains 185 . with the axis’ direction vector representing the positive Z axis. The endpoint closest to the cursor’s position when you select the line defines the base point of the axis’ direction vector. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. Done : Accepts the current rotation axis and direction. The axis line is associative. Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed.¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation. therefore. or bosses on an existing body. you must regenerate the solid to update the association between the line and the solid if the line changes.

The number of resulting solids. The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. Choose OK. To remove material from an existing body. 3. then choose Done. choose Add Boss. choose Cut Body. 3. 2. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). then choose Done. whether the chains are nested. 6. 1. However. Loft. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. choose Create Body. then choose Done. cuts. Solids. clear Combine Operations. Indicate the type of blend method to use: 186 . Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. 4. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. called the path chain. (optional) Choose Sync. Select two or more closed chains of curves.of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. 4. or a boss on an existing body. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path. 2. 1. To add material to an existing body. a cut on an existing body. 5. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. Sweep. Choose Main Menu. and whether you combine operations. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. select Combine Operations. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). Choose Main Menu. Solids. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep.

¨ ¨ ¨ To create a smooth blend. clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. Time-saving tips for creating lofted solids Lofted solids sometimes require a large amount of processing time. which takes less time to calculate. you reduce the time it takes for the system to calculate the solid. then create each additional lofted solid as a boss on the first body. Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. especially when the lofted solid is defined by many chains or if some or all of the chains contain splines.¨ ¨ 5. ¨ Use a sync method when selecting the chains. 6. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. You can increase the calculation speed for lofted solids by trying one or more of the following actions: ¨ Limit the number of chains to four or five and select the chains that provide the most accurate overall definition for the solid. By indicating how the chains should be aligned. choose Create Body. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. however. ¨ Create the lofted solid as a ruled solid. choose Cut Body. choose Add Boss. the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar. ¨ Create the lofted solid in multiple operations using four or five adjacent chains at a time. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect. To remove material from an existing body. 187 . by selecting the Create as Ruled parameter on the Loft Chain dialog box . Create the first lofted solid as a separate body. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend. Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies. To add material to an existing body. however. ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

you must use the default extrusion direction. even if Combine Operations was not selected during initial creation. the result is a cube-shaped solid. regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. or Sweep Chain dialog box. regardless of whether the chains are nested. which must be closed. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. you can tell Mastercam to combine operations on multiple chains into a single operation instead of creating a separate operation for each chain. or Sweep Cut/Boss operations by adding new chains. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. You can combine operations only when creating new cuts or bosses on an existing body. Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). You choose this option by selecting Combine Operations in the Extrude Chain. You cannot combine operations when creating a new solid body or modifying parameters from the Solids Manager. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. With the regular construction method. or boss. ¨ With the regular construction method. Revolve. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. ¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. or sweeping chains of curves. combine operations when modifying the geometry of existing Extrude. Revolve Chain. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. 188 . however. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces). if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. revolving. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. however. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. For example. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu. cube-shaped solid. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. If. ¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. cut. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. cut. which has four vertical walls. With the thin-wall construction method. The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid.Thin-wall vs. the result is a hollowed-out. You can. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids. or boss. With the regular method. Combining solid operations When you create a new cut or boss operation by extruding. you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. With the thin-wall construction method. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid.

Creating a cylinder-shaped primitive solid 1. Solids. These solids are not defined by curve geometry. 2.You can also tell Mastercam to combine appropriate operations when you create operations as part of finding features on a brick solid. then choose Done to convert the selected surfaces into one or more solids. Instead. Creating solids in pre-defined (primitive) shapes The Primitives menu gives you options for creating primitive solids. a closed solid body is created. Stitching from the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box. Mastercam aggregates operations on selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single operation. then choose OK to complete the operation. Next menu. Mastercam displays the Primitives menu when you choose Main Menu. Stitching surfaces can result in the same kind of sheet solid as removing one or more faces from a closed solid body. Solids. predefined shapes. The Stitch Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box opens. "Create edge curves on open edges?" Choose Yes to select a color for the edge curves and create an open sheet body with edge-curve geometry. the Select surfaces menu displays. Cylinder. Choose No to create the open sheet body without edge-curve geometry. Notes: ¨ If Mastercam cannot create a closed solid body. Choose Main Menu. 189 . Next menu. From surfaces. and edge gaps between surfaces are within a specified tolerance. a message asks. since you only have to edit parameters once from the Solids Manager. ¨ You can set default parameter values for the Stitch Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box by choosing Solids Settings. Primitives. an open sheet body is created. ¨ You can change an open sheet body into a closed solid body by thickening it. they are solids that are created in simple. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. Mastercam creates a cylinder-shaped solid in the graphics window. ¨ If you selected Use all visible surfaces. ¨ If you cleared Use all visible surfaces. Next menu. Primitives. Select one or more surfaces in the graphics window. This function is useful for working on imported files containing surface representations of a solid or for converting newly constructed surfaces that may have been created to replace problem surfaces. Choose Main Menu. Combining operations makes it easier to modify similar or repetitive operations involving multiple chains. Otherwise. Solids. 1. Stitching surfaces into solids The From Surfaces function lets you create one or more solids from selected surfaces by "stitching" them together. If you select all surfaces. In this case. Mastercam immediately converts all visible surfaces into one or more solids.

then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Choose Name.2. Next menu. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. 4. choose Base point. choose Axis. Note: This step is optional. Mastercam names it "Cylinder" by default. ¨ To set the orientation of the cone. 190 . Choose Main Menu. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Choose Name. 2. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cylinder’s bottom face. Mastercam names it "Cone" by default. ¨ To set the size of the cone. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. Top radius. you must enter a value in the prompt area. If you choose not to name the operation. Cone. choose Base point. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. choose Axis. ¨ To set the position of the cone. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. ¨ To set the position of the cylinder. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Cone menu as follows: Choose Done to exit the Cylinder menu. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Cylinder menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the cylinder. and Taper angle. you must enter a value in the prompt area. 4. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. 3. Choose Done to exit the Cone menu. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. choose Height and Radius. Primitives. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cone’s bottom face. choose Height. 3. Note: This step is optional. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. After choosing any of these options. Btm radius. ¨ To set the orientation of the cylinder. Solids. After choosing either option. Mastercam creates a cone-shaped solid in the graphics window. If you choose not to name the operation. Creating a cone-shaped primitive solid 1.

If you choose not to name the operation. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axes that correspond to the block’s height and length. ¨ Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Sphere menu as follows: To set the size of the sphere. Block. Next menu. Choose Done to exit the Block menu. 2. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Block menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the block. ¨ To set the position of the block. choose Base point. Enter two points in the graphics window for opposing corners of the block’s bottom face. Note: This step is optional. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. If you choose not to name the operation. choose Height. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the sphere. 3. choose Base point. Mastercam names it "Block" by default. Note: This step is optional. ¨ To set the orientation of the block. Sphere. and base point. and Width. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the block’s bottom face. Solids. 4.Creating a block-shaped primitive solid 1. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. 2. Mastercam names it "Sphere" by default. choose Radius. Choose Main Menu. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Mastercam creates a sphere-shaped solid in the graphics window. Choose Name. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. Next menu. After choosing any of these options. The block’s height is unchanged. Choose Name. ¨ To set the position of the block. Length. choose Axis (H) and Axis (L). 191 . then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Mastercam creates a block-shaped solid in the graphics window. Mastercam updates the length. Solids. Choose Main Menu. Primitives. Creating a sphere-shaped primitive solid 1. 3. width. choose Corners. then enter a value in the prompt area. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. ¨ To set the block’s position and 2D size in one step. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the block about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Primitives.

Torus. resulting in an open sheet body. Creating a torus-shaped primitive solid 1. choose Base point. 3. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Primitives. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].4. Modifying Solids Removing faces from a solid The Remove Faces function lets you remove selected faces from a solid. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the torus’ hole. Mastercam creates a torus-shaped solid in the graphics window. The Remove Faces From a Solid dialog box opens. Removing one or more faces from a solid can result in the same kind of sheet solid as Stitching from surfaces whose edge gaps are too large to create a closed solid body. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. choose Maj radius and Min radius. 4. 2. Solids. If you choose not to name the operation. After choosing either of these options. Choose Main Menu. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Torus menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the torus. Notes: Choose Done to exit the Sphere menu. Next menu. Choose Main Menu. Select the faces to remove. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. choose Axis. Next menu. 192 . you must enter a value in the prompt area. ¨ To set the position of the torus. Remove faces. Mastercam names it "Torus" by default. ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. 1. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. then choose Done. 2. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. You may use this function to remove faces that have problems identified by the Check Solid function or to remove faces so that new surfaces can be constructed and then stitched using the From Surfaces function. You can remove faces from either a closed solid body or a sheet entity. Solids. Note: This step is optional. ¨ To set the orientation of the torus. Choose Name. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. Choose Done to exit the Torus menu.

To specify a thickness. 3. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. Mastercam selects it automatically. or bosses on an existing body. The number of resulting solids. whether you combine operations. To thicken one side only. blank. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. 4. Thickening a sheet solid The Thicken function lets you thicken an open sheet solid and thereby convert it into a closed solid body. Choose OK to complete the operation. Choose Main Menu. and this step is unnecessary. and other parameters that further define the results. 1. cuts. Choose Main Menu. 5. or delete the original solid and what level the resulting solid will be placed on. Indicate whether to keep. whether the chains are nested. Select a sheet solid in the graphics window. 2. then choose OK. accept or change the value in the Thickness text box. Next menu. Select one or more chains. A direction arrow displays on the selected solid. and what construction method you use. You can use this function in conjunction with the From Surfaces function to turn selected surfaces into a solid that can be managed like any other solid created in Mastercam. Choose OK to complete the operation. Extrude. In the Name text box. The Thicken sheet solid dialog box opens. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. To reverse the thickening direction. 2. enter a name that will identify this operation in history (or use the default entry. ¨ Both Sides. 4. Solids. 1. 193 . Indicate which side of the solid to thicken: ¨ One Side. then choose Done.3. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window and it is a sheet solid. Thicken. cuts on an existing body. To thicken both sides. Set the extrusion direction. Solids. indicating which side will be thickened. distance. 3. "Thicken"). choose Both sides. and the Sheet thickening direction menu displays. choose One side. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane. Creating cuts on a solids Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. choose Flip. then choose OK to complete the operation.

and the Revolve menu displays. Select one or more chains. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point. 3. 6. To add material to an existing body. 5. 194 . or bosses on an existing body. whether the chains are nested. whether you combine operations. and what construction method you use. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. Set additional parameters as needed.Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. cuts on an existing body. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. 1. select Combine Operations. cuts. Revolve. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. The number of resulting solids. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. To remove material from an existing body. ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. then choose Done. 2. However. Solids. 4. choose Create Body. choose Add Boss. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. then choose OK. clear Combine Operations. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. choose Cut Body. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Choose Main Menu. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4).

1. 5. choose Create Body. clear Combine Operations. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. then choose Done. then choose Done to set the axis. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep.4. 4. planar chains of curves. ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. 7. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. The system sweeps chains of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. However. whether the chains are nested. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. and whether you combine operations. To create new solid bodies. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. to create one or more new solid bodies. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. choose Add Boss. 3. choose Create Body. Choose Main Menu. The number of resulting solids. choose Cut Body. called section chains. cuts on an existing body. To remove material from an existing body. 6. Sweep. Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed. 195 . ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. then choose OK. 2. Solids. ¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed. Set additional parameters as needed. called the path chain. then choose Done. select Combine Operations. cuts. or bosses on an existing body.

a cut on an existing body. 5. clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. 1. choose Create Body. 196 . (optional) Choose Sync. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. or a boss on an existing body. 3. ¨ ¨ 5. To add material to an existing body. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. choose Cut Body. choose Add Boss. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. 6. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Choose OK. The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. Indicate the type of blend method to use: To create a smooth blend. choose Cut Body. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. Solids. Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. select Combine Operations. check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend. To remove material from an existing body. 6. Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. 4. To add material to an existing body. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). ¨ ¨ ¨ Select two or more closed chains of curves. Loft. clear Combine Operations. However. choose Add Boss. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box.¨ ¨ To remove material from an existing body. 2.

the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). regardless of whether the chains are nested. however. regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces). the result is a cube-shaped solid. With the thin-wall construction method. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. For example. the result is a hollowed-out. however. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. cut. you must use the default extrusion direction. ¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids. or boss. however. you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. With the regular method. Thin-wall vs. cut. With the thin-wall construction method. Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. If. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. 197 . ¨ With the regular construction method.Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect. ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction. cube-shaped solid. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. which must be closed. With the regular construction method. which has four vertical walls. or boss. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu.

¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). cuts. Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. select Combine Operations.¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. choose Create Body. 5. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. 3. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. or bosses on an existing body. Choose Main Menu. then choose OK. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. choose Cut Body. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point. you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. whether the chains are nested. 6. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. 2. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. Select one or more chains. The number of resulting solids. Set the extrusion direction. whether you combine operations. and what construction method you use. clear Combine Operations. Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. cuts on an existing body. and other parameters that further define the results. 198 . To remove material from an existing body. Set additional parameters as needed. To add material to an existing body. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane. then choose Done. 4. choose Add Boss. Solids. 1. distance. Extrude.

The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. Revolve. choose Cut Body. Choose Main Menu. or bosses on an existing body. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). 6. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. then choose OK. choose Create Body. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. Solids. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. To create new solid bodies. and the Revolve menu displays. ¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed. select Combine Operations. To remove material from an existing body. Set additional parameters as needed. Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. and what construction method you use. clear Combine Operations. The number of resulting solids. cuts. whether you combine operations. 2. However. 1. 4. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. However. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. 5. 199 . To process each chain selection as a separate operation. Select one or more chains. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. choose Add Boss. whether the chains are nested.Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). then choose Done to set the axis. 7. 3. then choose Done. cuts on an existing body. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method.

Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. or a boss on an existing body. The system sweeps chains of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box. choose Create Body. Choose Main Menu. and whether you combine operations. Sweep. then choose Done. 1. whether the chains are nested. or bosses on an existing body. a cut on an existing body. (optional) Choose Sync. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. To remove material from an existing body. select Combine Operations. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. 1. to create one or more new solid bodies. then choose Done. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path. To add material to an existing body. Solids. However. Loft. 2. called section chains. Choose OK. 200 . cuts. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. cuts on an existing body. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). planar chains of curves. choose Cut Body. choose Add Boss. called the path chain. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. 2. 5. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. 3. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). 6. The number of resulting solids. 4. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. Solids. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep.Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. clear Combine Operations. Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation.

you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. For example. cube-shaped solid. the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar.3. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids. the result is a hollowed-out. clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. With the thin-wall construction method. however. however. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. To add material to an existing body. Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. the result is a cube-shaped solid. choose Cut Body. Indicate the type of blend method to use: To create a smooth blend. With the regular method. ¨ ¨ 5. which must be closed. however. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. Thin-wall vs. the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. 6. check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend. regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. If. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select two or more closed chains of curves. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). choose Add Boss. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction. 4. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces). choose Create Body. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect. To remove material from an existing body. Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. which has four vertical walls. ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. 201 . Choose OK to close the dialog box. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file.

¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. regardless of the changes. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. Chamfering a solid using one distance This function defines a chamfer using one distance. You determine the extent of the chamfer by specifying distances and possibly an angle to offset the chamfer from the selected edge on the adjoining faces. Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu. or boss. cut. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Chamfering solid edges When you choose Chamfer from the Solids menu. 202 . the Chamfer menu displays to give you options for creating chamfers. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. then choose Done. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. Solids. A chamfer is a type of edge blending that has a linear crosssection. or beveled edges. the entire face or body remains chamfered. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. 3. Click on the topics below for more information. With the thin-wall construction method. Chamfer. 1. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. Choose Main Menu. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. which determines where the chamfer is positioned along both edge faces. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. 2. Select the edges. 1 Distance. ¨ With the regular construction method. you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. The system chamfers solid edges by introducing new faces that add material to or remove material from the selected edges and that are not tangent with the adjoining faces of the original edge. on solids. then choose OK to chamfer the edges. regardless of whether the chains are nested. or boss. With the regular construction method. ¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. faces. you must use the default extrusion direction. cut.Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. and/or whole solid bodies to chamfer.

If you selected an edge. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional faces and/or edges. 203 . 3. 2. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens. Choose Main Menu. 4. Select one of the two faces that are adjacent to the edge. See "Defining a reference face" in the Related Topics below for more information. 4. Select one of the two faces that are adjacent to the edge. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. If you selected an edge. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional faces and/or edges. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. 1. 5. 5. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens. 2 Distances. Chamfering a solid using a distance and an angle This function defines a chamfer using a distance and an angle. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. Solids. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. then choose Done. regardless of the changes. Note: Mastercam uses this face to calculate the distance and angle that you define in step 5. which determine where the chamfer is positioned along the edge faces.Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. the entire face or body remains chamfered. which determine where the chamfer is positioned along the edge faces. Chamfering a solid using two distances This function defines a chamfer using two distances. then choose OK to chamfer the edges. regardless of the changes. the entire face or body remains chamfered. then choose Done. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Select a face or an edge. then choose OK to chamfer the edges. Mastercam displays the Pick Reference Face menu. Solids. See "Defining a reference face" in the Related Topics below for more information. 1. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. Select a face or an edge. then choose Done. Mastercam displays the Pick Reference Face menu. Note: Mastercam uses this face to calculate the first distance that you define in step 5. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. 2. Dist/Ang. Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. Chamfer. 3. Chamfer.

Trimming solids to a plane 1. Flip : Reverses the trimming direction. Next menu. The direction arrow in the graphics window points to the side of the plane on which the solids will not be trimmed. Next menu. 2. Choose Main Menu. the entire face or body remains chamfered. then choose Done. Solids.Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. Mastercam displays the Define Plane menu. regardless of the changes. Trim). Solids. Mastercam displays this menu after you select the solids you want to trim (Main Menu. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. Trim. to a surface. Trimming solids The Trim Solids menu gives you options for trimming selected solids to a plane. Keep All : When set to N. The default name is Trim. Name : Returns you to the prompt area where you can name the solid trim operation. Choose Plane from the Trim Solids menu. keeps trimmed parts in the drawing as brick solids. or to an open sheet body. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. When set to Y. Plane : Trims the solids to a plane that you define using the Define Plane menu. and this step is unnecessary. Sheet : Trims the solids to an open sheet solid that you select in the graphics window. and for choosing whether or not to keep what was trimmed as new "bricks" (solid bodies with no history). Mastercam selects it automatically. Surface : Trims the solids to a surface that you select in the graphics window. 204 . removes trimmed parts from the drawing. 3. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body.

Mastercam selects it automatically. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Note: This step is optional. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. set Keep All to N. 2. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. which points to the side of the surface on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. 7. Define the trimming plane. Trimming solids to a surface 1. 3.4. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. 6. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. If you choose not to name the operation. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. Choose Main Menu. Choose Name. Next menu. Select a surface in the graphics window. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. set Keep All to Y. Solids. Trim. Choose Name. Note: This step is optional. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. if necessary. to reverse the trimming direction. 4. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. 8. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. Choose Surface from the Trim Solids menu. and this step is unnecessary. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. then choose Done. Choose Done to trim the solids. 7. Mastercam displays a temporary plane marker in the graphics window. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. to reverse the trimming direction. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. 205 . Choose Flip. If you choose not to name the operation. Notes: ¨ The trimming plane must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. if necessary. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. 6. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. set Keep All to Y. The arrow points to the side of the plane on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. 5. set Keep All to N. Choose Flip. 5. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. To keep trimmed parts as bricks.

You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Choose Sheet from the Trim Solids menu. 8. Next menu. Trim. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. then choose Done.8. set Keep All to N. If you choose not to name the operation. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid. Select an open sheet body in the graphics window. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. 4. If you delete. Trimming solids to a sheet 1. if necessary. Choose Name. Choose Flip. 3. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. ¨ The trimming surface must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. ¨ The edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the trimming surface. move. to reverse the trimming direction. 5. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. move. which points to the side of the sheet body on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Notes: ¨ The edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the trimming surface. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid. If you delete. Solids. Notes: Choose Done to trim the solids. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid. Choose Main Menu. 206 Choose Done to trim the solids. Note: This step is optional. and this step is unnecessary. 7. 2. . then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Mastercam selects it automatically. set Keep All to Y. 6. To keep trimmed parts as bricks.

If edges are added to or removed from a filleted face or body. you can visualize the void in the interior of the solid if you use translucent shading. Note: Fillets that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. Fillet. and thickens the solid’s faces to form the solid’s shell. The Shell Solid dialog box opens. faces. which leaves a void. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. and you cannot see into the solid if it is shaded. Filleting solid edges The Fillet function that you access from the Solids menu lets you fillet the edges of solids. Set the shell direction and thickness as needed. 1. you can turn on the display of hidden lines to distinguish the solid’s inner walls. Choose Main Menu.¨ The trimming surface must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid. Note: When you shell whole solids. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces. as if a ball is rolled along each selected edge and material is either added to or removed from the ball’s path to form the smooth edge. Filleting is a type of edge blending that results in a rounded edge by introducing new faces that are tangent to the edges’ adjacent faces. Select the faces and/or whole solid bodies to shell. then choose Done. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. You determine the extent of the fillet by specifying the radius of the rolling ball or crosssection. Solids. and/or whole solid bodies. then choose Done. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. Filleting solid edges using a constant radius 1. A fillet is also referred to as a rolling ball blend because it has a circular cross-section. 207 . You can define the fillet’s radius using a constant radius value or by varying the radius value along the edge. However. Shell. there are no entry holes into the solid. Select one or more edges. regardless of the change. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. Solids. The remaining faces are thickened by a specified amount. 2. 2. 3. Choose Constant Radius. then choose OK to shell the selected solids. Similarly. the entire face or body remains filleted. Choose Main Menu. Shelling solids The Shell function lets you hollow solid bodies by removing material and optionally leaving selected faces open. If you select individual faces on a solid. the system hollows the solid. 3. the system removes the material from the interior of the solid. and thickens the remaining faces to form the solid’s shell.

and change radius values. 5. 3. 2. the entire face or body remains filleted. In the prompt area. Inserting a radius midway between two existing radii along a solid edge 1. then choose OK to create the fillets. remove a radius. Varying the radius along filleted solid edges The Fillet Edit menu gives you options for editing the radius of solid fillet operations that are defined using a variable radius. regardless of the change. then choose OK to create the fillets. Choose Insert Dyn from the Fillet Edit menu. 3. You can use this menu to insert a radius. Choose Insert Mid from the Fillet Edit menu. then click. Choose Variable Radius. To access this menu. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. then choose Done.4. Note: Fillets that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. Note: You cannot create variable radius fillets if your selection includes solid faces or whole solid bodies. then click to snap to the point. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected edge. If edges are added to or removed from a filleted face or body. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. Use the mouse to slide the base of the arrow to the location where you want to insert a radius. 208 . move the cursor crosshair over the point. enter a value for radius. Mastercam marks the position of the radius with a display point in the graphics window. Fillet. Note: To enter a radius at the position of an existing point. 4. Continue to edit the filleted edges. Select one or more edges. See the related topics below for more information. Filleting solid edges using a variable radius 1. 4. Set other parameters and edit radii as needed. Select an edge on the solid that you are filleting or editing. Choose Main Menu. Solids. Set other parameters as needed. 2. choose the Edit button on the Fillet Parameters dialog box during the creation or editing of a solid fillet operation. check radius values. type [S] to activate snapping. Inserting a radius at any position along a solid edge 1.

2. 4. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. See the related topics below for more information. 2. See the related topics below for more information. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. 3. Mastercam displays the current value of the radius. In the prompt area. Choose Remove from the Fillet Edit menu. See the related topics below for more information. Use the mouse to slide the base of the arrow to the location where you want to position the radius. 4. See the related topics below for more information. then typing a new value in the Radius text box. Select an edge on the solid that you are filleting or editing. Note: You can also change the value of a radius by selecting it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box. select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to edit. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. 2. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the radius marker. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. 209 . select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to edit. Continue to edit the filleted edges. Choose Modify Pos from the Fillet Edit menu. Continue to edit the filleted edges. Choose Modify Rad from the Fillet Edit menu. type [S] to activate snapping. In the prompt area. move the cursor crosshair over the point. In the graphics window. Note: To position the radius at the location of an existing point. enter a new value for radius. Changing the position of a radius on a solid edge 1. In the graphics window. 3. Continue to edit the filleted edges. Changing the value of a radius on a solid edge 1. then click. enter a value for radius. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. then click to snap to the point.Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. 4. Removing a radius from a solid edge 1. Mastercam displays a temporary point to mark the midpoint between the two closest radii. 3.

drafting results in faces being deleted from the solid. Checking and changing radius values on a solid edge 1. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. Continue to edit the filleted edges. See the related topics below for more information. regardless of whether the solid was created in Mastercam or imported from a Parasolid file. Take one of the following actions: ¨ To change the value of the highlighted radius. or remove draft from a face. If the adjacent faces are unable to accommodate the new geometry. For example. When draft is added to a solid face. which is particularly useful for mold-making. Continue to edit the filleted edges. change draft on a face. like a chamfered face. a filleted face can be drafted. Mastercam highlights a display point that marks the location of a radius and displays the radius value at this location. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. ¨ To maintain the current value of the highlighted radius. Mastercam exits the function. it has the effect of creating a tapered wall. Note: You can also check and change the value of a radius marker by selecting it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box. 3. Note: You can also remove a radius marker by right-clicking to select it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box. Failure is more likely to occur with larger draft angles or if adjacent faces are tangent (or near tangent) and are not also being drafted. then press [Enter]. Repeat step 2 to check the remaining radius values. Mastercam cycles to the next radius. then typing a new value in the Radius text box. The method that you use determines where a drafted face hinges. After the last radius. which changes its geometry from cylindrical to planar. When a face is drafted. 2.2. You can draft virtually any solid face. press [Enter]. select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to remove. In the graphics window. type a new value for radius in the prompt area. 4. Choose Cycle from the Fillet Edit menu. In some cases. Mastercam removes the display point at this location. Drafting solid faces using a reference face 210 . The Draft Faces function gives you four methods of drafting solid faces. the operation fails. 3. the adjacent faces are trimmed and/or extended to accommodate the new geometry of the drafted face. The Draft Faces function lets you add draft to a face. Drafting solid faces Drafting solid faces is the process of tilting the faces by a defined angle and direction. then choosing Remove from the right-click menu.

Select a planar solid face. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. which is used to calculate where the drafted face hinges and the draft direction. then choose Done. 1. 5. Note: You can extend the draft along tangent faces by checking Propagate along tangencies on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box before choosing OK. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. then choose Done. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face selected to be drafted) and the reference face. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. See the graphic following the procedure for more information. 211 . The second graphic shows the drafted face and how the adjacent faces were extended to accommodate it. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. This face must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. where one face is drafted using the Draft to Face method.The Draft to Face method requires you to select a planar reference face. 6. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference face. If needed. 7. and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. draft direction. The first graphic illustrates how the hinge point. The operation fails if there is no intersection. Select one or more faces to draft. Next menu. ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Choose OK. and draft angle are calculated. Enter a value for Draft Angle. Draft faces. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. 2. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operations. 3. Choose Draft to Face. ¨ The following graphics show the side view of a solid. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Choose Main Menu. The hinge point can be located on or off the solid. Notes: ¨ The reference face that you select for the draft plane in step 6 is associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. 4. Solids. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid.

Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid. See the graphic following the procedure for more information. Choose Main Menu. 212 . which is used to calculate where the drafted face hinges and the draft direction. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. Select one or more faces to draft.Drafting solid faces using a reference plane The Draft to Plane method requires you to define a reference plane. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face selected to be drafted) and the reference plane. Solids. then choose Done. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference plane. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu 2. and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. The hinge point can be located on or off the solid. Next menu. 1. Draft faces. The operation fails if there is no intersection. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box.

Failure is more likely with a larger angle. This plane must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Enter a value for Draft Angle. such as a geometric line. The reference edges that you select define the hinge points for the drafted faces. For a planar face. then choose Done. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Define Plane menu. 7. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Choose Draft to Plane.3. etc. 5. Drafting solid faces using one or more reference edges The Draft to Edge method requires you to select one or more edges on each face being drafted. Notes: ¨ The reference plane that you define in step 6 is not associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. the draft direction is perpendicular to the face. 4. If needed. 213 . The draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. The following graphics show the left side of a block drafted using the XY plane with a Z value of . Define the reference plane. a solid face. the draft direction follows the edge. even if you defined the plane using geometry. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. 6. For a linear edge. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference plane to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. Choose OK. The draft direction is defined by a selected linear edge or planar face. ¨ ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft.5.

Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. Solids. ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. then choose Done. 4. Select one or more faces to draft. 7. This application of this draft method has limited uses and fails if the edges overlap or turn back on themselves when looked at in the draft direction. Mastercam attempts to break the original face into multiple drafted faces.1. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. ¨ When multiple edges are selected for a face. Mastercam cycles to the next selected face if more than one face was selected in step 2. 3. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. Enter a value for Draft Angle. Next menu. 214 . Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference edges or linear edge or planar face are reflected in the associated operations. 6. If needed. 8. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. The reference edges define the hinge points for the drafted face. 2. a separate face corresponding to each reference edge. Specify the draft direction by selecting a linear edge or a planar face. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. 5. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more reference edges on the face that is currently highlighted in the graphics window. such as with a dovetail shape. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. then choose Done. Choose OK. Repeat step 6 for each additional face. Notes: ¨ The reference edges that you select in steps 6 and 7 and the linear edge or planar face that you select in step 8 are associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. 9. then choose Done. Choose Draft to Edge. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow along the edge or on the face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. Draft faces. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. The following graphics show a face that is successfully drafted using multiple reference edges (highlighted in red).

Drafting solid faces for an extrude operation The Draft Extrude method requires you to select lateral faces (walls) swept out from an extrude operation. However. The drafted faces hinge at the intersection of the original faces (the faces selected to be drafted) with the planar chains of curves that defined the original extrude operation. . A negative value is measured with respect to the direction opposite the extrusion direction. All of the faces that you select must be lateral faces (walls) swept out from an extrude operation. Next menu. Note: When you perform an extrude operation. Choose Draft Extrude. you have the option to draft the resulting lateral faces. 4. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. and the draft angle is measured with respect to this direction. Choose Main Menu. all of the lateral faces are drafted using the same draft angle and direction. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Notes: ¨ A larger value results in more tilt. 1. 3. Draft faces. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Faces operation for each solid. choose Done. Enter a value for Draft Angle. A positive value is measured with respect to the extrusion direction. Notes: 215 Choose OK to draft the faces. After selecting the faces. 2. 5. Select one or more faces to draft. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. Solids. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. The draft direction follows the extrusion direction. ¨ This value can be positive or negative.

Boolean functions let you construct a solid using combinations of two or more existing solids. Performing a Boolean operation The Boolean menu.¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Choose Main Menu. When performing a Boolean function. In places where the tool bodies that you select in step 4 intersect the target body that you select in step 3. material will be removed. ¨ To remove solids from one another. which displays when you choose Boolean from the Solids menu. all other material will be removed. subtract solids from one another. Indicate the type of Boolean operation to perform: ¨ To add solids together. Regardless of the number of tool bodies you use. Mastercam displays the Boolean menu. The curves that defined the original extrude operation are highlighted in red and now form the hinges for the drafted faces. You then select one or more tool bodies. the result of each Boolean operation is always a single body. which are the solids that are added to. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. or overlapped. and find the common region defined by overlapping solids. choose Common. ¨ The following graphics show an extruded solid whose lateral faces have been drafted along the extrusion direction. Material from the tool bodies that you select in step 4 will be added to the target body that you select in step 3. 2. removed from. lets you select from several types of Boolean functions. In places where the tool bodies that you select in step 4 and the target body that you select in step 3 overlap. 1. Solids. 216 . material will be kept. removed from. or overlapped with the target body. choose Remove. choose Add. You can add solids together. which results in cuts on the target body. Boolean. you must first identify a target body. ¨ To find common solid regions. This is the solid that material is added to.

An operation is invalid when a change has been made that Mastercam is unable to incorporate into the model. You can drag operations to roll back a solid or to change the operation order. An operation is dirty when its parameters and/or geometry have been modified. try adjusting the parameters or geometry of any invalid operations. thus preventing the solid from being rebuilt. Symbols used in the Solids Manager The Solids Manager uses many symbols to communicate information about operations. ¨ Choose No to cancel the Boolean operation. without changing either the target or the tool. You must regenerate the solid in order for the changes to be incorporated into the model at which point the operation will be ‘clean’ and the dirty symbol will be removed. If a Boolean Remove or Common operation fails because it would create a disjoint body. Indicates that the move is not allowed when dragging an operation in the operation list. a message displays giving you the option to create a non-associative Boolean (a brick solid). Set Target to Y (keep target body) or N (remove target body). Clicking on this symbol expands the tree structure of operation details. Marks the end of the operations that define a solid. Marks an invalid operation. Creating and keeping a non-associative Boolean will create entirely new brick solids that represent the resulting disjoint pieces. Indicates that there are additional operation details. You can roll back a solid to a previous state by dragging the stop operation icon to a new position in the operation list. Note: Mastercam is unable to create disjoint bodies and maintain associativity between them.3. Indicates that the move is allowed when dragging an operation in the operation list. Select a target body. 4. Respond in one of the following ways: ¨ Choose Yes to continue the Boolean operation and display the Keep menu. Then choose Done to complete the Boolean operation. Set Tools to Y (keep tool body) or N (remove tool body). You can drag operations to roll back a solid or to change the operation order. To correct an invalid solid. then regenerating the solid. 5. 217 . Each symbol is described below: Symbol Description Marks a dirty operation. then choose Done to perform the Boolean operation. Select one or more tool bodies.

Indicates that the operation details are expanded. or Sweep operation. Indicates an Extrude. Indicates a solid. Clicking on this symbol collapses the tree structure of operation details. Indicates that there is editable geometry for this operation. When an icon has been grayed out. Indicates a Primitive Cylinder operation. Indicates a Mill or Lathe toolpath operation. Indicates a Shell operation. Indicates a Primitive Cone operation. Double-click this icon to edit the geometry. Indicates a Revolve operation. Double-click this icon to edit the parameters. Loft. Indicates a Chamfer operation. Indicates a Fillet operation. 218 . Indicates a Boolean operation. Indicates that there are editable parameters for this operation. it indicates that the operation has been suppressed and/or that the solid is in a rolled back state. Indicates a tool body or solid that is used in the associated Boolean operation.

Indicates a Trim operation. or press the Delete key on your keyboard. 2. Choose Main Menu. ¨ You cannot delete base operations or tool bodies. your actions could render the model invalid when you restore the suppressed operations. Right-click in the dialog box. Suppressing solid operations The Suppress function lets you build a solid without factoring in selected operations. edges. Note: You can select multiple operations from a single solid only. but not individual operations. 219 . Solids. Mastercam opens the Solids Manager dialog Select one or more solids or solid operations to delete. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Due to the dependent nature of solid operations. If you selected operations to delete in step 3. 3.Indicates a Primitive Block operation. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Indicates a Draft Face operation. then choose Delete. ¨ You can use Mastercam’s Delete function to delete and restore solids. Mastercam marks the corresponding solid dirty. ¨ If you delete a Boolean operation. box. Notes: ¨ Mastercam automatically deletes all operations whose input (selected faces. This way you can check the model in various states without having to delete and recreate operations. its tool bodies are restored as distinct solids that are no longer associated with the target body. 4. Deleting solids and solid operations 1. bodies) is dependent on the deleted operation. Indicates a Primitive Torus operation. It is important that you use the Suppress function only as a temporary model checking feature and that you pay attention to what actions you take while operations are suppressed. Indicates a Primitive Sphere operation. See the related topics below for more information.

you cannot edit its parameters or geometry or select it for use in any other operation. the operation is inserted after the final operation in the list. When you release the mouse button. The system rebuilds the model up to the stop operation. then release the mouse button. Note: You can select multiple operations from a single solid only. ¨ While an operation is suppressed. Mastercam rebuilds the model without the selected operations and grays out the icons of the suppressed operations in the list. When a solid is in a rolled back state. 1. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. follow the steps above. Right-click in the dialog box. your actions could render the model invalid when you return the stop operation to the end of the solid. 2. To restore a suppressed operation. However. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. All operations beyond the stop point are suppressed and are grayed out in the operation list. Choose Main Menu. 2. or revert. the operation can be unsuppressed only by unsuppressing the operation on which it is dependent. 220 . If other operations are dependent on the suppressed operation. Notes: ¨ A check mark displays next to the Suppress icon on the right-click menu of each suppressed operation. Due to the dependent nature of solid operations.1. You can roll back. 3. Rolling back a solid All solids listed in the Solids Manager. Solids. Select one or more operations to suppress. the system builds the model to the stop point only. Notes: ¨ The stop operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it. Select a stop operation to roll back. Solids. then choose Suppress. When you select the Suppress option a second time. ¨ To return the solid to its original state. it is extremely important that you roll back a solid only as a temporary model checking feature and that you pay attention to what actions you take while the solid is rolled back. including tool bodies. have a stop operation icon that marks the end of the operations that define the solid. The roll back feature is commonly used to fix invalid operations or to build a model one operation at a time when you are editing operations. Solids mgr. Drag it up through the history tree until it is positioned over a selected operation. Choose Main Menu. the check mark is cleared. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. and the operation is restored. ¨ You cannot suppress a base operation. as well. 3. the system automatically suppresses them. a solid to an earlier stage in its development by moving the Stop Op icon to different positions in the operation list. drag the Stop Op icon to the last operation in the list. If the operation is suppressed and does not have a check mark next to the Suppress option.

¨ When a solid is rolled back, operations that you perform are added to the end of the active operations in the model (before the stop point), instead of at the end of the operation list. Therefore, you may find the roll back function a useful way to insert an operation in the middle of the operation list instead of adding it to the end of the list, then dragging to the correct position, which sometimes fails due to operation dependencies. Identifying a solid operation based on its geometry You can identify an operation in the Solids Manager by selecting geometry in the graphics window. Mastercam matches the selected geometry (a solid face) with the operation that is defined by the geometry. This function is particularly useful when you are working on a complex solid that has a large number of operations. You can quickly identify the operation you’re looking for instead of having to check multiple operations using automatic or manual highlighting. Note: For more information on highlighting, see the related topics below. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Select. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window.

3. Select a solid face. Mastercam reopens the Solids Manager with the corresponding operation selected.

Renaming solids and solid operations The name assigned to a solid or solid operation can help identify it in the operation list of the Solids Manager. When you perform a solid operation, you have the option to assign it a unique name, or you can accept the default name, which reflects the operation type (e.g., Extrude Cut, Boolean Remove, Fillet, etc.). Unlike solid operations, solids cannot be assigned unique names when they are created. However, you can rename both solids and solid operations at any time from the Solids Manager. 1. 2. 3. field. 4. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a solid or operation. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Rename. The current name changes to an editable

Type a new name, then press [Enter].

Note: You can also rename an operation by editing the operation’s parameters and entering a new name in the Name field. Changing the order of solid operations The Solids Manager lists the operations that define each solid in the current file. The operations are listed in the order in which they are performed on the solid. You can change the order by dragging operations to new positions in the operation list. Mastercam will rebuild the solid based on the new operation order.

221

1. 2.

Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select an operation to move.

3. With the mouse button pressed, drag the operation to the desired position in the operation list, then release the mouse button. Mastercam rebuilds the solid using the current operation order. Notes: ¨ The selected operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it.

¨ As you drag an operation, the cursor changes to a downward arrow if the move is allowed or to a circle with a slash through it if the move is not allowed. The following moves are not allowed: ¨ ¨ You cannot move a base operation. You cannot move an operation to a position before a base operation.

¨ If an operation is dependent on one or more other operations, you cannot move it to a position ahead of the operation(s) on which it is dependent in the list.

Regenerating solids Regeneration is the process of rebuilding a solid so that it matches its associated operations. Regeneration is required when a solid becomes dirty or invalid due to changes that you make to the parameters and/or geometry of one or more of the solid’s operations. When you regenerate a solid, Mastercam incorporates your changes into the solid and restores the solid to a clean state, if possible. Regeneration fails if a solid has one or more invalid operations. When making a lot of changes to a model, it is useful to regenerate often. This way, if regeneration fails, you will have to make fewer corrections to return the operation to a valid state. For more information on dirty and invalid operations, see the related topics below. 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To regenerate all dirty or invalid solids, choose Regen All. To regenerate an individual solid, right-click to select the solid, then choose Regen Solid.

Accessing Solids menu options from the Solids Manager You can access the Solids menu options from the Solids Manager, which enables you to perform new solid operations without having to exit the Solids Manager dialog box. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Right-click anywhere in the list of operations.

222

3. Choose Solids. Mastercam displays a flyout menu containing all of the Solids menu options. For more information, see the related topics. Accessing the toolpath Operations Manager from the Solids Manager You can access the toolpath Operations Manager from the Solids Manager, which enables you to edit Mill or Lathe toolpaths that were created on solids and to access other toolpath functions without having to exit the Solids Manager dialog box. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Right-click anywhere in the list of operations.

3. Choose Operations Manager. Mastercam closes the Solids Manager dialog box and opens the Operations Manager dialog box. 4. Perform functions from the toolpath Operations Manager, as needed. When you close the Operations Manager, Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager. Note: For information on the toolpath Operations Manager, see the related topics below. Expanding and collapsing solid operation details The Solids Manager lists the operation history for each solid in the current file. You can expand or collapse the tree structure of a solid to show or hide a list of operations that define the solid. Likewise, you can expand or collapse the tree structure of each operation to show or hide its editable components (e.g., parameters and geometry). Note: Imported solids have no operation history. The tree structure of an imported solid lists only the operations that have been performed on the solid since it was imported into Mastercam. Expanding operation details 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To expand an individual operation, click on the plus (+) sign preceding the operation. To expand all operations for a solid, right-click on the solid, then choose Expand all.

Collapsing operation details 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To collapse an individual operation, click on the minus (-) sign preceding the operation. To collapse all operations for a solid, right-click on the solid, then choose Collapse all.

Duplicating solids 223

You can make exact copies of solids, including tool bodies. Each copy is an active solid that you can select and edit. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select one or more solids to copy.

3. Right-click in the dialog box, then choose Duplicate Solid. Mastercam creates a copy of each selected solid and lists the new solids at the end of the operation list in the Solids Manager. Note: This function is particularly useful if you want to use the same tool body to affect different target solids. Editing solid parameters You can edit the parameters that define a selected operation. Some of the original defining parameters, however, may not be editable. For example, you cannot change an extrude, revolve, sweep, or loft operation from a create to a cut or boss (or vice versa), but you can change any of these operations from a cut to a boss (or vice versa)—provided the change would not create disjoint bodies. There are no parameters to edit for Boolean and Trim operations. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Expand the list of components for the operation you want to edit, then double-click on Parameters.

3. Mastercam returns you to the dialog box or menu that is used to define the operation’s parameters. Make changes to the parameters, as needed, then choose OK to close the dialog box or Done to exit the menu. 4. Mastercam may require additional input, depending on the parameters that you edited. Follow the prompts on your screen. After all required input has been entered, the Solids Manager dialog box reopens. 5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Editing solid attributes You can edit a solid’s attributes by accessing the Solid Attributes dialog box from the Solids Manager. 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a solid. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Attributes. The Solid Attributes dialog box opens. Change one or more attributes, as follows:

¨ Level: Type the number of the level that you want to assign, or choose Level to select a level using the Level dialog box

224

¨ Color: Type the number of the color that you want to assign, or choose Color to select a color from the Color dialog box. ¨ ¨ 5. Notes: ¨ You can edit level and color attributes of a selected solid using the Attributes tab of the Analyze dialog box. ¨ You can set default entity attributes using the Screen tab and the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box. ¨ If entities do not change color, it may be because selected entities are being displayed in a group color instead of an entity color. (See Assigning a color to a group.) To apply the color change to group/result entities, use the Screen, Clr function. Recreating trimmed bodies After a trim operation, you can recreate as brick solids the parts of the original solid that were trimmed away and deleted from the drawing. The effect is the same as if you had turned on the Keep All option during the initial trim operation. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a trim operation. Style: Select a line pattern from the drop-down list. Width: Select a line thickness from the drop-down list. Choose OK to apply the current Solid Attributes dialog box settings to the selected solid.

3. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Recreate trimmed bodies. The Solids Manager dialog box closes. After Mastercam completes the operation, the Solids Manager dialog box reopens and displays the recreated solid bodies (bricks) in the history tree below the original solid. Editing solid geometry You can edit solid operations that are defined by geometry (i.e., chains, edges, etc.) Each solid operation is associated with the solid on which the operation is performed. Changes that you make to an operation’s geometry (adding selections, deleting selections, etc.) can affect the selected operation and its associated solid only. Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid, but does support creation of brick solids by Trim and Boolean (Remove, Common) operations. Note: No geometry is editable for Boolean (Add, Remove, Common) or Primitive (Cone, Block, Cylinder, Torus, Sphere) operations. Editing chains for solid operations Mastercam opens the Solid Chain Manager dialog box when you edit the geometry of an Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Loft solid operation, since these operation types are defined by chains of curves. The dialog box lists the chains that currently define the selected operation and gives you options for adding chains, 225

2. then choose Rechain All. The new chains replace the chains that previously defined the operation. Note: If the selected solid has only one geometry component. then choose Delete Chain. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Right-click on a chain in the list. then double-click on Geometry . 226 . Select one or more chains. which helps you identify chains to edit. 2. 3. To rechain all chains 1. cut. Select one or more chains. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. To edit chains 1. Note: When you select a chain in the list. Mastercam highlights the corresponding chain in the graphics window. and rechaining one or all of the chains. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. it will read ‘Geometry’. Select one or more chains. then choose Done. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Editing geometry for Extrude operations You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define an extruded solid. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. To delete chains ¨ Right-click on the chain to delete. then choose Rechain. To add chains 1. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains. The new chains are reflected in the list. right-click on a chain in the list. then choose Done. or boss. Choose Main Menu.deleting chains. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. 2. then choose Add Chain. Solids. then choose Add Chain. you can edit the faces that an extruded cut or boss is trimmed to if the Trim to selected faces parameter was turned on when the operation was initially defined. In addition.Chains. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. The new chains replace the selected chain in the list. To access these editing options. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Right-click anywhere in the dialog box. 2. Solids mgr. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. Right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Select one or more chains. then choose Done. To rechain a selected chain 1. then choose Done.

of the solid. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case. 4. or boss. To edit faces 1. then choose Rechain All. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 3. Solids. 227 . right-click the chain to delete. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. 2. Solids.¨ To delete a chain. cut. 1. Select one or more new faces. then choose Rechain. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. Expand the list of components for the Revolve operation you want to edit. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Editing geometry for Revolve operations You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define a revolved solid. then choose Done. Solids mgr. Choose Main Menu. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. which defines the outer boundary. then double-click on Geometry. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. ¨ The Extrude operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. 5. 4. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. right-click it in the dialog box. then choose Done. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain. Choose Main Menu. 2. Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. or cross-section. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Note: The faces that you select must be located on the solid with which the operation being edited was originally associated. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and cancels the original face(s) to which the boss or cut was trimmed. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. then choose Delete Chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. then choose Done.

The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. cut. then choose Done. then choose Done. 4. which defines the outer boundary. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains.3. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. then choose Done. ¨ To delete a chain. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. right-click the chain to delete. 2. 3. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. then choose Rechain All. Expand the list of components for the Sweep operation you want to edit. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. 228 . of the solid. ¨ The Revolve operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. Select one or more chains. then choose Done. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. or cross-section. or boss and the chain of curves (called a path chain) that defines the path along which the section chains are swept to form the solid. then choose Add Chain. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains. right-click it in the dialog box. Choose Main Menu. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. then choose Delete Chain. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. cut. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. See the related topics below for more information. Editing geometry for Sweep operations Each Sweep operation has two editable geometry components: the underlying chains of curves (called section chains) that define a swept solid. cut. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. ¨ To edit the rotation axis of a revolved solid. then double-click on Geometry – Section Chain. Solids mgr. 5. To edit the section chain 1. or boss. or boss. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. then choose Add Chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves. then choose Rechain. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case. Solids. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. you must edit the solid’s parameters. ¨ To rechain a selected chain.

1. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. then choose Delete Chain. Solids. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Solids. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. right-click it in the dialog box. Editing geometry for Loft operations You can edit the chains of curves that define the cross-sections of a lofted solid. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. Choose Main Menu. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves. then choose Done. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 4. 5. Solids mgr. then double-click on Geometry. Note: The selected chain must intersect the plane defined by the section chains. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. 2. 2. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. then double-click on Geometry – Path Chain. of the solid. Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then choose Rechain. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. or boss.¨ To delete a chain. right-click the chain to delete. which defines the outer boundary. 3. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. ¨ The Sweep operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. To edit the path chain 1. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: 229 . Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Select a chain of curves to be used as the path chain. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window in chaining mode. or cross-section. 3. cut. then choose Rechain All. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. Expand the list of components for the Loft operation you want to edit. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. 4.

Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. Select one or more chains. then choose Done. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. select highlighted edges. then choose Rechain All. faces. right-click it in the dialog box. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. ¨ To delete a chain. Note: There must be a minimum of two closed. 4. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. planar chains to define a lofted operation. 3. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Editing geometry for Chamfer operations You can edit the edges that define a chamfer operation. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. 230 . Note: If the fillet operation is defined as a variable radius fillet. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To fillet additional edges. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. then double-click on Geometry. Solids. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. select unhighlighted edges. then choose Rechain. then choose Add Chain. Mastercam maintains your original selection of edges. then choose Delete Chain. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. you will be able to select edges only. Solids mgr. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. To remove filleting from edges. 1. 1. faces. or the whole solid. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 5. right-click anywhere in the dialog box.¨ To add chains. 4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. 5. Choose Main Menu. Solids mgr. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 2. faces. or the whole solid. or the whole solid. Expand the list of components for the Fillet operation you want to edit. Solids. Editing geometry for Fillet operations You can edit the edges that define a fillet operation. right-click the chain to delete. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. then choose Done. ¨ To rechain all of the chains.

Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Note: Your selections are restricted to the solid on which the selected shell operation was originally defined. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Editing geometry for Trim operations 231 . Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Expand the list of components for the Chamfer operation you want to edit. select unhighlighted edges. select highlighted edges. which leaves a void. then double-click on Geometry. Redefine the shell operation by selecting new faces and/or the whole solid. Solids mgr. faces. Mastercam cancels your original geometry selection. Choose Main Menu. the system removes the material from the interior of the solid. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. 2. 1. Notes: ¨ If you select individual faces on a solid. Editing geometry for Shell operations You can reselect the geometry that defines a shell operation. or the whole solid. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. To remove chamfering from edges. 5. faces.2. you will be able to select edges and faces only. Solids. opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid. Mastercam maintains your original selection of edges. Note: If the chamfer operation is defined using two distances or a distance and angle. If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces. and thickens the solid’s faces to form the solid’s shell. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. 4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. and thickens the remaining faces to form the solid’s shell. or the whole solid. 5. 3. not the whole solid. faces. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To chamfer additional edges. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. the system hollows the solid. or the whole solid. 4. then double-click on Geometry. Expand the list of components for the Shell operation you want to edit. 3. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

¨ To trim the solid to a surface. then double-click on Geometry. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on a plane marker or surface in the graphics window. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. then select an open sheet body in the graphics window. This arrow points to the side of the surface on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. to reverse the trimming direction. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Solids mgr. 2. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. Expand the list of components for the Trim operation you want to edit. Solids. 232 . To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. set Keep All to N. choose Sheet. the edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the surface. Solids. Choose Main Menu. 6. choose Surface.You can redefine the trimming geometry and direction of a Trim operation. Solids mgr. 5. Editing geometry for Thicken operations You can redefine the thickening direction of a Thicken operation. If you delete. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. ¨ To trim the solid to a sheet. Take one of the following actions to redefine the Trim operation: ¨ To trim the solid to a plane. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Trim Solids menu. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Notes: ¨ The trimming plane or surface must fully intersect the solid in order to trim it. if necessary. Choose Flip. Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. set Keep All to Y. choose Plane. 1. Choose Main Menu. then select a trimming surface in the graphics window. 3. move. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. ¨ If the solid is trimmed to a surface. 4. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid. 1. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. then use the Define Plane menu to define a trimming plane.

To draft additional faces. 5. This arrow points to the side of the solid which is thickened. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. select highlighted faces. Solids. Click on the topics below for more information. 3. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using a reference face For Draft Face operations defined using a reference face (Draft to Face option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. to reverse the thickening direction.2. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. then double-click on Geometry. To remove draft from faces. To edit the reference face 1. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the solid in the graphics window. The original reference face has been cancelled. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. Solids. select unhighlighted faces. Solids mgr. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Sheet Thickening Direction menu. if necessary. 3. then double-click on Geometry – Plane Face. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 3. 4. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Main Menu. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. 233 . Editing geometry for Draft Face operations The editable geometry components for a Draft Face operation vary depending on how the operation was defined. you can edit the drafted faces and the reference face. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Select a new planar reference face. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. 2. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. This face must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Expand the list of components for the Thicken operation you want to edit. Solids mgr. 2. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. To edit drafted faces 1. Choose Flip.

then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. Solids mgr. Solids mgr. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. If needed. 4. then double-click on Geometry – Plane. The original reference plane has been cancelled. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. To edit the reference plane 1. 5. 5. Note: The reference face that you select in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using a reference plane For Draft Face operations defined using a reference plane (Draft to Plane option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). you can edit the drafted faces and the reference plane. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. Solids. 2. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference plane to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. If needed. select unhighlighted faces. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. Define a new reference plane. 234 . Solids. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit.4. To remove draft from faces. To edit drafted faces 1. To draft additional faces. This plane must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. 2. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Define Plane menu. 3. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. 3. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. select highlighted faces. Choose Main Menu.

Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. select unhighlighted faces. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. Choose Done. 2. then choose Done. Mastercam reopens the Solids Manager dialog box. Notes: ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. ¨ The reference edges that you select in steps 5 and 6 are associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. 7. To edit drafted faces 1. you can edit the drafted faces and the reference edges. ¨ When multiple edges are selected for a face. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Mastercam attempts to break the original face into multiple drafted faces. select highlighted faces. Mastercam cycles to the next face if more than one face was selected in step 3. Solids mgr. When you finish selecting edges for the last face. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. a separate face corresponding to each reference edge. The reference edges define the hinge points for the drafted face. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. 235 . 3. 6. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 5. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. To remove draft from faces. To draft additional faces. Select one or more reference edges on the face that is currently highlighted in the graphics window.5. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using reference edges For Draft Face operations defined using reference edges (Draft to Edge option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Solids. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Repeat step 5 for each additional face. Choose Main Menu. such as with a dovetail shape. Note: The reference plane that you define in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. This application of this draft method has limited uses and fails if the edges overlap or turn back on themselves when looked at in the draft direction.

select unhighlighted faces. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. Solids. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. If needed. then double-click on Geometry – Direction. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. To edit drafted faces 1. you can edit the drafted faces. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. 236 . Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. 4. then double-click on Geometry. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. 5. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. Solids mgr. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. To remove draft from faces. 2. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow along the edge or on the face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. 3. 2.To edit the reference plane 1. 4. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. select highlighted faces. 5. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using an existing Extrude operation For Draft Face operations defined using an existing Extrude operation (Draft Extrude option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). Solids. Define a new draft direction by selecting a linear edge or planar face. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Note: The linear edge or planar face that you select in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. The geometry that defined the original direction has been cancelled. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. 3. Solids mgr. Choose Main Menu. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To draft additional faces. Note: All of the faces that you select must be lateral faces (walls) swept out from the extrude operation.

Unlike auto-highlighting. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y].Highlighting solid operations Highlighting is used to identify the geometry associated with an operation. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the operation that’s currently selected in the Solids Manager. Removing features is useful when you need to create toolpaths that precede or ignore the features. you can also tell Mastercam whether or not to combine appropriate operations by combining selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single operation. such as holes and fillets. Mastercam highlights the corresponding geometry in the graphics window.". Highlighting solid operations automatically The auto-highlight feature is an on/off toggle. the geometry remains highlighted until you select a different operation or close the Solids Manager dialog box. For more information. Solids. When you select a feature to detect. 1. When it’s on. Right-click anywhere in the operation list. 1. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. For information on turning off autohighlighting. see the related topics below. see the related topics below. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Highlighting solid operations manually Manual highlighting is used to identify the geometry associated with a selected solid operation. Auto-highlighting is turned on when there is a check mark next to the Auto-Highlight option and off when there is no check mark next to the option. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the selected operation. 2. on imported bricks or other solid bodies whose base operation in the history is "Body. but you can still highlight selected operations manually. Note: Highlighting an operation is a useful way to check and be sure you have selected the correct operation before editing it. Note: When the auto-highlight feature is off. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the selected operation. 2. Solids. 237 . you can also tell Mastercam whether to remove detected instances of the feature or to recreate the operations and any associated geometry needed to reconstruct the detected instances of the feature. Choose Main Menu. Right-click to select an operation. Creating solid operations adds them to the solid’s history tree. 3. Choose Main Menu. then choose Highlight. Note: The Highlight option is grayed out if auto-highlighting is active. highlighting is disabled. Finding solid features The Find Features function lets you find specified features. where they can be modified using the Solids Manager. Click on the topics below for more information. You can highlight operations automatically or manually. choose Auto-Highlight. the highlighting lasts for only a couple of seconds then disappears. When you create operations. To change the status of the auto-highlight feature. Unlike manual highlighting. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. It can be used only when auto-highlighting is turned off.

Indicate the type of function to perform: To recreate detected fillets as operations. Mastercam selects it automatically. Finding. and creating fillets on a solid body The Find Features function lets you detect. Find features. 3. clear Combine operations. When finding and recreating holes in a single face. and creating holes on a solid body The Find Features function lets you detect. then choose Done. removing. 6. and create through holes and blind holes (pass through solid in one direction) on brick solids. If Mastercam cannot recreate the hole. select Combine operations. Next menu. 5. Choose OK to perform the function. the Find Features function modifies the solid by removing features and adding operations to its history. ¨ ¨ Under Feature. Combining operations aggregates multiple chains into one extrude cut operation. the operation fails. or suppressed operations. where possible: ¨ ¨ 7. Mastercam will try to extend one face and cap the hole in a single plane. To specify the size of fillet to detect. accept or change the values in the Minimum Radius and Maximum Radius text boxes. or trim operations. Mastercam recognizes the contours of the face the hole cuts through. 2. The Find Features function only recognizes features on imported brick solids or on brick solids created in Mastercam from stitching. To remove detected fillets from the solid body. 4. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. To fillet similar edges as one operation. Combining operations fillets similar edges as one operation in history. indicate whether or not to combine operations. To recreate each fillet as a separate operation. If a hole cuts through multiple faces. 238 . and this step is unnecessary. The Find Features function will not recognize solid bodies with dirty. Only holes whose radius falls within a specified range are detected. Only fillets whose radius falls within a specified range are detected. and create constant-radius fillets on brick solids. choose Fillets. 1. Solids. Boolean.When operating on a brick. choose Create operations. remove. Finding. while maintaining the modified brick as a solid body at the top of the history tree. remove. invalid. The Find Features dialog box opens. choose Remove features. If you chose to create operations in step 4. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. removing.

239 . 2. Next menu. ¨ Color: Type the number of the color that you want to assign. select Include blind holes. 6. Width: Select a line thickness from the drop-down list. then choose Done. choose Create operations. If you chose to create operations in step 4. ¨ 7. 8. ¨ Level: Type the number of the level that you want to assign. Indicate the type of function to perform: To recreate detected holes as extrude cut operations. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. ¨ To exclude blind holes and detect only thru holes. as follows: ¨ Offset: Type the value of the offset—the distance of the new geometry from the outermost point on the adjacent solid—you wish to use. The Find Features dialog box opens. you can change default attributes of new geometry created to reconstruct detected holes. accept or change the values in the Minimum Radius and Maximum Radius text boxes. clear Include blind holes. 3. indicate whether or not to combine operations. Mastercam selects it automatically.1. Solids. If you selected Holes in step 3 and Create Operations in step 4. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Choose New Geometry Attributes to change one or more attributes. choose Remove features. 4. and this step is unnecessary. ¨ ¨ Under Feature. where possible: ¨ To combine operations on multiple chains into one extrude cut operation. or choose Select to select a level using the Level dialog box. Find features. If you chose to find holes in step 3. To specify the size of hole to detect. indicate whether or not to include blind holes: ¨ To detect blind holes (pass through solid in one direction only) as well as thru holes (pass completely through solid). clear Combine operations. choose Holes. or choose Color to select a color from the Color dialog box. To recreate each hole as a single-chain extrude cut operation. ¨ ¨ Style: Select a line pattern from the drop-down list. select Combine operations. To remove detected holes from the solid body. Choose Main Menu. 5.

4. Choose Main Menu. For example. Check Solid. with file formats in which healing during import is supported. then choose Check Solid. 3. a confirming message displays. Choose Main Menu. This function is particularly useful for analyzing the integrity of imported solids and identifying entities that you may need to repair or reconstruct. the Check Solid dialog box redisplays and lists up to ten errors. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Choose Zoom to selected item to magnify the selected error in the graphics window. You can access the Check Solids function from the Analyze Surfaces menu. Analyze. This function identifies and describes specific errors and highlights their location in the solid drawing. which can be subsequently stitched using the From Surfaces function. a confirming message displays. Right-click on the selected solid. 2. Choose Check Solid. Solids. Or you may use the Remove Faces function to remove faces having problems identified by the Check Solid function in order to reconstruct new surfaces. you may want to reimport the file with this feature turned on. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. If no errors are detected. Only. If errors are detected. 240 . Choose OK to perform the function. If errors are detected. Choose Perform Check. make sure Edit is set to Y. Solids. Surfaces. The Analyze Solid dialog box displays. from the Analyze Solid dialog box. Select a solid in the list. Checking solids from the Solids Manager 1.9. Notes on managing error display When errors are listed in the Check Solid dialog box: ¨ ¨ Select a listed error to highlight its location in the graphics window. a confirming message displays. Checking solid models for errors The Check Solid function analyzes solids for error conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling operations. Checking solids from the Analyze Solid dialog box 1. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. Analyze. The Check Solid dialog box displays. or from the Solids Manager. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. 2. 2. Choose Main Menu. On the Analyze Entity menu. 3. If no errors are detected. Checking solids from the Analyze Surfaces menu 1. If errors are detected. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. If no errors are detected. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. 3.

A4 .MC9 file in the MC9\TITLE BLOCKS sub-directory. so you can easily keep them separate from your original part. If you leave this box blank.841 x 1189 mm You can also select Custom and type in your own dimensions. edit this file. to the layout. such as title blocks on the bottom or sides.297 x 420 mm A2 .75.5 x 11 in. Use a scale of less than 1 if all the drawings won't fit on the page size you have selected.34 x 44 in. You can use this function multiple times.594 x 841 mm A0 . for the same solid or for different ones. Choose any of the following to learn about the different dialog box options: Paper size Select any of the following paper sizes: English Metric A . D . you can reset Maximum number of errors to a higher value (default is 10) and choose Perform Check see if there are more detectable errors. Suppress hidden lines Select this option if you do not want hidden lines to show. C . The border design should be stored in the SHEETAS.210 x 297 mm A3 . Solid Drawing Layout Use the Solid Drawing Layout function to create a layout of different part views (for example. If you wish. you can change the scale later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu. use . not 75%.11 x 17 in. top. ¨ If ten errors are listed. and isometric). Enter numbers as decimals: for example. Load border template Select this option to add a border design. Mastercam will just draw a plain solid line matching the paper dimensions. You can change this later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu. each time you create a new layout.22 x 34 in. Once you create the basic layout from this dialog box. Mastercam automatically places the new drawings on their own level.17 x 22 in. To change the border design. Scale factor You can have Mastercam automatically scale each view by the percentage you enter here. 241 .420 x 594 mm A1 . arranged within a standard page. E . make sure you select a new level for it (unless you want to replace an existing layout). B . side.¨ Choose Unzoom to return the graphics window to the original display scale.8. front. you can customize it further.

Or choose User defined to create your own layout. 4View ANSI includes Top. Indicate whether or not to display hidden lines in the solid drawing layout (you can change this setting later): ¨ ¨ If you do not want to see hidden lines. Note: The Solid Drawing Layout function works on only one solid at a time. Front. To see hidden lines. select Suppress hidden lines. 2. 3View ANSI includes Top. 7. Choose a layout view format. Left. 4. Select a paper size. 242 . Indicate whether or not to apply a page border.Right Side 2 – Front 6 – Left Side 3 – Back 7 – Isometric 4 – Bottom 8 – Axonometric If you have created any custom graphics views in this file. and Isometric views. 5. 3View DIN includes Bottom. Solids. Type up to 4 numbered views (separated by commas) in the text box. and Right views. You can change this setting later. When you finish. you can select those as well. The value you type in here will be applied to each of the views. 3. Front. 6. Choose Main Menu. Front. Front. Layout. Enter a scaling factor for the different views. and Left views. clear Suppress hidden lines. Right. you will have multiple views of your part laid out within a standard size page. Choose a paper orientation: Portrait (tall) or Landscape (wide). Choose from the following: 1 – Top 5 . Next menu. 1. and Isometric views.Layout view selection Choose from four standard layouts: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ 4View DIN includes Bottom. Creating a drawing layout Example Follow these steps to create a drawing layout. The Solid Drawing Layout dialog box opens.

Choose OK. Configure. 10. the layout is created. Mastercam prompts you to enter a level in the prompt area. choose Level. When you click on it. 12. Find the level that contains the part. To exit Solid Drawing Layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Make sure you select a level that doesn’t already contain part information or geometry (any entities on the level will be deleted). Type a level number and. The Solid Drawing Layout menu appears in the menu area. then choose All.8. The Levels dialog box opens. You can also press [Alt+E] to display the Hide menu.) Tip: To hide your original part. instead of opening the Levels dialog box. 9. 11. or press [Esc]. Level and select the layout level in the Levels dialog box. you are prompted to choose one. Screen tab). Example: Creating a drawing layout Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see the sample part. If your drawing contains more than one solid. choose Main Menu or Backup. a name. You can use it to customize or enhance your drawing layout. Screen. if desired. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. Note: All of the entities in the drawing layout will be placed on this level. a plate with a pocket and four mounting holes: BEFORE 243 . Choose OK (or press [Enter] after each prompt area entry). Note: If Enter level in prompt area is selected in your screen configuration settings (choose Main Menu. This menu will be active until you choose Main Menu or Backup. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. and click the red check mark next to it so that the level does not display.

you can return to this menu by choosing Backup until it reappears. This menu gives you options for customizing a layout drawing. you will create a new drawing layout. and the Gview automatically changes to Top. and all Solid Drawing Layout menu commands will apply to it. You can see the original part in the lower corner. (If you choose the Solid Drawing Layout function again. Once you exit. or pressing [Esc]. while this menu is active will cause you to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment.) 244 . you can still use the toolbar or the Secondary Menu to access other Mastercam functions. Click here to see the settings that were used in the Solid Drawing Layout dialog box. After Customizing the drawing layout Immediately after you create a drawing layout. If another Mastercam function displays a different menu. Choosing Backup or Main Menu.Choose the After button to see the drawing layout produced by the Solid Drawing Layout function. the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays. The lower-left corner of the paper boundary is automatically placed at X0Y0. While this menu is active. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit the current drawing layout.

) Changing the hidden lines display Choosing the Hidden Lines option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you fine-tune how hidden lines are displayed on your drawing layout. Reset : Opens the Solid Drawing Layout dialog box. Allign : Aligns a view along a vertical or horizontal axis.Solid : Creates a new drawing layout for a different solid. other Solid Drawing Layout menu functions will apply only to the new drawing layout and not to a previous one. or removes a view. Customizing the drawing layout Immediately after you create a drawing layout. or pressing [Esc]. while this menu is active will cause you to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. and all Solid Drawing Layout menu commands will apply to it. however. using the same setting as the current layout. you can return to this menu by choosing Backup until it reappears. you can still use the toolbar or the Secondary Menu to access other Mastercam functions. You may. Hidden Lines : Displays the Hidden Lines menu. where you can recreate the drawing layout. Pan : Moves a view from one point to another. you will create a new drawing layout. where you can change how hidden lines are displayed for one or more of the views. the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays. section. or cross-section views. Scale : Changes the scale of one or more views. Paper Size : Changes the paper size. (If you choose the Solid Drawing Layout function again. Once you exit. using current or new settings. If another Mastercam function displays a different menu. 245 . Rotation is measured counter clockwise. Add/Remove : Creates and adds defined. Front to Side). you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit the current drawing layout. Choosing Backup or Main Menu. Note: After you use this command. or detail by an angle you specify. Chg view : Changes the orientation of a view (for example. custom detail. place the new layout on a different level. Rotate : Rotates the selected view. While this menu is active. This menu gives you options for customizing a layout drawing.

If you typed Custom. press [Enter] after each entry.) Changing the paper size Choosing the Paper Size option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you select a new paper size for the drawing layout. Choose Hide all or Show all to hide or show all hidden lines for all of the drawings in the layout. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. 1. The Hidden Lines menu displays. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Specify a scaling option: 246 . 1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 2. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. In the prompt area. 2.) Changing the scale Choosing the Scale option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you select a different scale for one or more views in the drawing layout. The Scale menu displays. choose Scale. Then press [Enter].1. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Paper size. you will be prompted to enter an X and Y dimension. 3. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 3. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Choose one of the Hidden Line options: ¨ Choose One view to toggle the hidden lines display for a single view. 2. The new page will still have its lower-left corner at X0Y0. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Hidden lines. ¨ ¨ Choose Toggle all to reverse the settings for all of the drawings. You will be prompted to select a view in the graphics window. type the letter code for the desired paper size or type Custom to enter your own dimensions. The individual views will be redistributed evenly in the new page.

From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. the drawings will go back to their original size. Note: This command also works on cross-sections and detail views. 2. not 75%. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout.) The scaled views are positioned at the center point of the original views. For example. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. Changing the orientation of a view Choosing the Chg View option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you change the orientation of one of the views. Enter numbers as decimals: for example. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. When prompted. 4.) Moving a view Choosing the Pan option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you drag a single view to a new location. ¨ Choose Scale all to change the scale for all the views. Use the Align feature to align the drawings with each other. if you change the scale once to . either horizontally or vertically. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. click on any point in the desired view. use . Note: The scale amount is always relative to the original size. ¨ ¨ Use the Pan feature to move a single drawing to a desired point. 4. 247 . Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment.¨ Choose Scale one to change the scale for a single view. Use the same Gview numbers as for custom layout selection. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Select one of the views by clicking on any of its points or entities. type the number of the new view and press [Enter]. 3. and the entire view will move with it. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Chg view. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. 3. You need to select one point in a view. and then change it again and enter 1. 1.75. Enter a scale amount in the prompt area and press [Enter].75. In the prompt area.

Use the mouse to sketch a point. choose Align. The Point Entry menu displays. the rotation will be measured counter-clockwise. you may use the mouse to sketch a point. You can choose this point in two ways: ¨ ¨ Drag the mouse to a new point anywhere in the graphics window. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. Select a reference point. Choose a destination point. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. Click anywhere on the desired view to select it. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. On any view. Use the Point Entry menu to choose a point. 248 . choose Pan. Note: In this step and the next. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. 2. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu.) Rotating a view Choosing the Rotate option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you rotate a view around its center point. and click at the desired point. 1. 3. 2. Use positive numbers only. 2. 4. The reference point you selected in step 2 will move here. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. 4. Aligning views Choosing the Align option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you line up a view along a vertical or horizontal axis. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Rotate. select a reference point to move from. Mastercam displays intersecting horizontal and vertical axes that indicate where the selected views will line up. 3. anywhere in the graphics window. 1. The Point Entry menu displays. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Enter a rotation angle in the prompt area and press [Enter]. Use the Pan or Align features to re-position the rotated drawing in line with the others. Note: This command also works on cross-section and detail views.1.

You can add as many new elements as you wish. cross-section. or a 3D plane. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Adding and removing views Choosing the Add/Remove option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you create and add new views to your layout or remove existing views from your layout. You can add any or all of the following views: ¨ ¨ ¨ Currently defined graphics views Cross-section views of various orientations Detail views When you use this menu option. Add Details : Creates detail drawings that zoom in on small sections of a part.3. Add Section : Adds a cross-section view to the drawing layout. you are no longer limited to four views. Mastercam is smart enough to figure out whether it should align the view to the horizontal or vertical axis. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. Remove : Removes an entire view. or detail drawing. choose the point that you want to align to one of the axes. a zigzag cross-section. 4.) Resetting a drawing layout Choosing the Reset option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays the original Solid Drawing Layout dialog box and lets you replace the current drawing layout with a new one based on the selections you make. Add View : Adds a currently defined graphics view to the drawing layout. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. You can define a cross-section based on a straight horizontal or vertical line through any point in the part. On any view outside the selected reference point. 249 . the Add/Remove menu displays. When you choose Add/Remove. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout.

Creating and adding detail views Example Use the Add Detail option to zoom in on a section of a view and add a detail drawing to the layout. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 3. ¨ ¨ 3. 250 . Add Detail. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. Click anywhere on a view to remove it completely. Removing views Use the Remove option to delete all of the entities associated with a particular view. 2. 1. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. In the prompt area. choose Add/Remove. The Point Entry menu displays. 4. Select a color and scale factor for the new view and choose OK. 2. 5. 2. The Parameters dialog box opens. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Add/Remove. Note: Use the same Gview numbers as the custom layout selection. type the number of the new view and press [Enter]. 3. choose Add/Remove. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Choose OK when prompted to confirm the selection. you can use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. section or detail that has been added. Remove. The Detail Type dialog box opens. Add View. Important: You cannot use Mastercam’s Undo function to reverse this operation.Adding defined views Use the Add View option to add a currently defined graphics view to the drawing layout. 1. Once you have added the new view. 1. Select the type of detail view to create: Circle Rectangle Choose OK. Use it to delete any of the original views or a view. Select the location for the new view.

6. This example shows a Circle detail. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. Note: For a Circle detail. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. the point you select will be the center of the detail drawing. which became the center of the detail area. The focus of the detail is the bolt hole indicated by the white circle: BEFORE Choose the After button to see the detail view created by the Solid Drawing Layout function. Example: Adding a detail view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see part of a sample drawing layout. Select the location for the new view. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. Use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. Drag the mouse to define the zoom area and click when you are done. The Point Entry menu displays 7. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. 5. Select a color and scale factor for the section view and choose OK. The selected point is on the rim of the bolt hole.. The Parameters dialog box opens. and a different color for clarity’s sake. For a Rectangle detail. or use the Point Entry menu to choose a boundary point. The example uses a scale of 2X. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. the point will be one of the corners.4. 8. Select the point you want to zoom in on. 251 .

Select an orientation for your cross-section: Straight cross-sections ¨ Horizontal The section is based on a horizontal line through the part at a point you select. the cross-section is based on the line through these points. 1. 252 . The Section Type dialog box opens. ¨ 2 points You are prompted to select two points on a view. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Add/Remove. 2.AFTER Creating and adding section views Examples Use the Add Section option to define a cross-section view and add a drawing of it to your layout. Add Section. ¨ Vertical The section is based on a vertical line through the part at a point you select.

Mastercam automatically draws the connecting lines for you. 6. Example: Adding a cross-section view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. 4. The color will apply to all entities created as a result of this operation) and scale factor ( You can have Mastercam automatically scale each view by the percentage you enter here. To select a plane. Use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. as prompted. Mastercam automatically draws the connecting lines for you. 7. The Point Entry menu displays. Note that. for the section view and choose OK. the Point Entry or Define Plane menu displays. Note: To select a point. Select the point (or points) or plane where you want the section to divide the part. You can have as many segments as you wish. Select a color (Use this option to choose a color that will apply to just this operation. the second indicates where it ends. unlike other cross-section methods. The first point of the pair indicates where a segment begins. you can change the scale later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 5. the plane is set with respect to the solid itself rather than the graphics window. as prompted. Use a scale of less than 1 if all the drawings won't fit on the page size you have selected. Choose OK. The first point of the pair indicates where a segment begins. use the Define Plane menu and enter additional information or points. The Parameters dialog box opens. Select the location for the new view. Enter numbers as decimals: for example. 253 .75. use . using the Define Plane menu and entering additional information or points..Zigzag cross-sections ¨ Horizontal You will be prompted to select several pairs of points. not 75%) If you wish. You can have as many segments as you wish. The white circle shows the point that will be the basis for the cross-section. ¨ Vertical You will be prompted to select several pairs of points. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. ¨ 3D Plane You are prompted to define a cross-section plane. 3. Each pair of points defines a vertical segment of a cross-section. the second indicates where it ends. Each pair of points defines a horizontal segment of a cross-section. Depending on your selection in step 2. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. use the mouse to sketch a point.

a different color was specified. a corresponding line appears in the Side view at lower right. In addition.Choose the After button to see the cross-section view that has been added. A Horizontal line cross-section was selected. based on the point shown above. the Align feature was used to line it up with the other views. 254 . You can see on the Top view where Mastercam drew an extra line to indicate the precise location and orientation of the section. After adding the section view.

Example: Adding a zigzag cross-section view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. 255 . Choose the After button to see the cross-section view that has been added. After adding the section view. Mastercam automatically draws a bounding box around the cross-section. In the Top view. then drops down to the lower-right bolt hole. The left-most white circle shows the start of the first segment. This example shows how to create a crosssection that cuts through the boss and pocket on the upper-left of the part. the Align feature was used to line it up with the other views. It continues to near the "X". Mastercam adds the lines showing the precise location of the cross section. then drops down to cut through one of the bolt holes.

25. which is about where the starting point is in the Before drawing. Choose the Step 1 button to see the cross-section view that has been created.Example: Adding a 3D-Plane cross-section view Step-by-Step This example shows a cross-section created by defining a plane. 256 . The cross-section is based on an X=const plane. The white circle shows the approximate starting point of the cross-section. X=1. This example replaces the side view on the lower right with a cross-section through the boss and pocket. in this example. Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. which cuts the cross-section through the YZ plane at whatever X value is specified.

Choose the After button to see how the original side view is replaced by the new cross-section. then the Pan command is used to move the new section view to that location. The Remove command is used to delete the lower-right view. the Align feature is used to line it up with the front view. Finally. 257 .

Sign up to vote on this title